Administrator Command
Reference Manual
AVEVA Solutions Limited
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.
1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.
1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.
1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.
The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall
not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results
from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.
AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
September 2011 12.1.1
Comments / Remarks
Linewidths example added under Query section.
Dabacon Buffer Size section incorporated.
January 2012
Copyright added to all pages.
January 2013
Intellectual Property
incorporated.
January 2013
12.1.SP4
Rights
(IPR)
Protection
Additions to chapter 7.3.54 Merge Changes.
changes
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Administrator Command Reference
Manual
Contents
Page
Reference Manual
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Macros
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Stand-Alone DICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
DICE Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
DICE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Reconfiguration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Reconfiguration Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Starting up RECONFIGURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Administrative and Querying Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Basic Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Reconfiguring a Single Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Source Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Destination DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying What Will be Copied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Reconfiguration Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of a Simple Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:2
3:3
3:4
3:4
3:4
3:5
Using the SAMEREF Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Using the SESSIONS Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Listing the Reference Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
i
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Global Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Controlling RECONFIGURER Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Copies and Reconfigured Copies of DBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Copies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Reconfigured Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Advanced Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
References Between Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Updating References into a Reconfigured Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Saving the Reference Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Copying Parts of Databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Copying Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
Transferring Data Between Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
Upgrading a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Reconfiguration Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17
Standard Information Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17
General Format of Pass 2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18
Codes Used to Identify Message Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18
Database Transfers between Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19
Binary and Character Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Reconfiguring a Global Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Reconfiguring Extracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
Outputting Changes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The SAMEREF Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The SESSIONS Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconfiguring a Single Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconfiguring a Family of Extracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The RCFUPDATE Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Reconfiguring a Three Level Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reconfiguring the Transaction Database in a Global Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:21
3:21
3:21
3:21
3:21
3:22
3:22
3:24
System and Global Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Structure of the Local System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Structure of the Global Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Transaction Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Structure of the Transaction Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
ii
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
TRMSGW Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
TRYEAR, TRMONT and TRDAY Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
TRUSER and TRLOC Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
TRINCO Element (Input Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
TROUCO Element (Output Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
TROPER Element (Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:9
TRMLST, TRSLST, and TRFLST Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
TRMESS, TRSUCC, and TRFAIL Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Project Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Project Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Global Project Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Module Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Font Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Querying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
General PDMS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Data Integrity Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Command Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Notes on Syntax Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Detailed Descriptions of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
ACCESS (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
ACRADD (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
ACRREM (Project definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
ADD (Project definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
ADMINISTER (Global Project Administration - Remote Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6
ALLOCATE (Global Project Administration - Hub only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:8
ALPHA (General PDMS Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
AUTHUSERREM/OVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
BACKTRACK (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11
BRIEF (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13
CANCELCOMMAND (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:13
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
iii
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
CDESC (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANGE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECK (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKOPTION (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CNAME (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COP (Project definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURRENT (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DADD (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEALLOCATE (Global Project Administration - Hub only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFER (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELETE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DREMOVE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUMP (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUPLICATENAMES (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDIT (Module definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORFILE (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ERRORS (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCHANGE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCLUDE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPUNGE (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTRACT (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINISH (General PDMS Command). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FONTDIRECTORY (Font definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FONTFAMILY (Font definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FROM (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FULL (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERATE (Global Project Administration - Hub only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GETWORK (General PDMS Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HUBLOCATION (Global Project Administration - Hub only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE (Project definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIALISE (Global Project Administration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISOLATION (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST (Querying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCK (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAKE GLOBAL (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAXERRORS (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAXUSERS (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
iv
7:14
7:15
7:19
7:21
7:24
7:25
7:27
7:33
7:34
7:35
7:37
7:37
7:40
7:40
7:41
7:42
7:44
7:44
7:44
7:45
7:46
7:47
7:49
7:51
7:51
7:52
7:54
7:55
7:55
7:56
7:57
7:58
7:58
7:59
7:60
7:62
7:63
7:64
7:64
7:65
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
MAXWARNINGS (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:65
MERGE CHANGES (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:66
MESSAGE (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:68
MODE (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:69
MODULE (Module Definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:70
MOVE (Project Administration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:72
NEW (Project definition and Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:72
NEW STAMP (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:74
PASSWORDLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:75
PING (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:76
PREVOWNER (Global Project Administration - Hub only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:76
PROJECT (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:78
PURGE (Project Administration and Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:80
QUERY (Querying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:80
RCFCOPY (Reconfiguration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:85
RCFUPDATE (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:87
RCFUPGRADE (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:88
RECONFIGURE (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:88
RECOVER (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:89
REINIT (Reconfiguration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:92
REMOTE (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:92
REMOTEMESSAGE (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:98
REMOVE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:99
RENEW (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:100
REORDER (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:101
REPAIR (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:101
REPLICATE (Project definition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:102
RESETXREFS (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:104
REVERT (Project Administration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:105
SAVEWORK (General PDMS Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:106
SET (Project definition and Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:106
SORTALLOCATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:107
STATISTICS (Data Integrity Checking). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:108
STATUSSESSION (Querying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:108
STOP (Data Integrity Checking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:109
SYNCHRONISE (Global Project Administration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:109
SYSTAT (Querying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:113
SYSTEMLOCATION (Global Project Administration - Hub Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:115
TADD (Project definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:116
TERM (General PDMS Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:117
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
v
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
TO (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSFER (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TREMOVE (Project definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TTFONT (TrueType font definition). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNLOCK (Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPDATE (Global Project Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPGRADE (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USERADD TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USERREM/OVE FROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VB (Reconfiguration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XREF (Reconfiguration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7:117
7:118
7:120
7:120
7:121
7:122
7:125
7:125
7:126
7:126
7:127
Dabacon Buffer Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Specifying the Dabacon Buffer Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Per Module Per Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Per User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Querying the Amount of Unused Dabacon Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Affect of Setting the Dabacon Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Drawing File Name and Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
vi
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Introduction
1
Introduction
This manual describes the PDMS Administration commands for Standard (non-global) and
Global projects. It is written for System Administrators who are already experienced
administration users and who wish to write macros or use command input, rather than the
GUI.
The content of this manual is based on the assumption that you are already familiar with the
concepts that a PDMS System Administrator needs to understand. If you are not familiar
with these concepts, you should refer to the relevant user guide, as follows:
•
Using PDMS Administration for a standard (non-global) project is described in the
Administrator User Guide, which tells you how to set up and administer PDMS projects
using the GUI. The User Guide also describes the concepts that PDMS System
Administrators need to understand.
•
Using Plant Design Global via the GUI is described in the Global User Guide, which
also describes the concepts in Plant Design Global that PDMS System Administrators
need to understand.
Within the manual, commands that are only available in AVEVA Global are labelled as
Global Project Administration Commands. Some of these commands are only available at
the Hub of a Global Project, and this is also shown. Some options in standard commands
are only available in Global Projects and these options are also indicated by 'Global' in
associated text.
This manual also describes how to use DICE, the PDMS Data Integrity Checker, outside
PDMS, as there is no GUI for the stand-alone module. It also describes database
reconfiguration, which is also a command line or macro operation.
1.1
Macros
Most people who read this manual will be writing macros, either to run into PDMS when
required, for example, to create a new project, or as part of customising the ADMIN
interface.
There are some commands in ADMIN which automatically create simple PDMS macros.
These are command files which can be read back into PDMS. In particular, you can use the
REPLICATE command to create a macro which will replicate a project.
For information about writing more complicated macros using the PDMS Programmable
Macro Language, (PML), see the Software Customisation Guide and the Software
Customisation Reference Manual.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
1:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Introduction
1.2
How to Use This Manual
Stand-Alone DICE
applies to Standard and Global projects and describes how to
run the PDMS Data Integrity Checker, DICE, from outside
PDMS. This chapter is included in the Command Reference
manual as there is no interface to stand-alone DICE, and you
will need to enter commands interactively or via a macro.
Reconfiguration,
applies to Standard and Global projects and describes
database reconfiguration.
System and
Projects
Global
applies to Standard and Global projects. It contains maps of the
System Database and Global Database Hierarchies, and a list
of the ADMIN elements and their attributes that can be set
explicitly by the user.
Transaction Database
applies to Global projects only, and describes the transaction
database, the elements in it, and their attributes.
Command Summary
applies to Standard and Global projects. It lists the ADMIN
commands in functional groups.
Command Details
applies to Standard and Global projects. It occupies the
majority of the manual and describes every ADMIN command.
The descriptions appear in alphabetical order of command
names.
Dabacon Buffer Size
specifies buffer requirements for running a project.
Drawing File
and Folders
file name conventions used for Drawing and Picture files during
propagation.
Name
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
1:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Stand-Alone DICE
2
Stand-Alone DICE
The Data Integrity Checker (DICE) can be run as a stand-alone program outside PDMS.
This may be necessary if the System database has been corrupted, and you cannot enter
PDMS.
Stand-alone DICE is started up using the script named dop, supplied in the PDMSEXE
directory. Give the following command, outside PDMS:
$PDMSEXE/dop
For a summary of the commands that you can use in DICE, see the Data Integrity Checking
commands in Command Summary.
Commands to exit from DICE in stand-alone mode are:
STOP
FINISH
You can send the reports generated by DICE to a named file in your working directory using
the ALPHA command.
2.1
DICE Errors
PDMS obtains the text of all its user messages from an external file. When DICE is used
from within a PDMS project, this file is automatically available, but this is not the case in
stand-alone mode. Hence the next command you must give in stand-alone mode is the
ERRORFILE command, followed by the name of the error message file. For example:
ERRORFILE /%PDMSEXE%/MESSAGE.DAT
Note: This file will contain error messages referring to the operation of DICE itself, not any
errors DICE has found during the checking process
The default name of the message file can be found from the entry for DICE in the current
version of makmac.mac, the project configuration macro.
2.2
DICE Commands
Set up the options you require using the following commands (see the appropriate
command pages for details):
•
ERRORFILE
•
MODE
•
MAXERRORS
•
MAXWARNINGS
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
2:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Stand-Alone DICE
•
STATISTICS
You can send the reports generated by DICE to a named file using the ALPHA command.
You can check one or more DB files by using the CHECK command. In this mode, you can
only refer to databases by their external filenames rather than by their internal PDMS DB
names. Up to ten files may be specified in a single command.
Note: The EXTERNAL command cannot be used in stand-alone mode (or by REMOTE
CHECK), because only one DB file can be accessed at a time.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
2:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3
Reconfiguration
PDMS RECONFIGURER is run from within ADMIN, but only by using the command line.
In order to understand why database reconfiguration may be necessary, and to appreciate
the steps involved, it is helpful to have some knowledge of PDMS database structures and
their management. For a summary of this information, including an explanation of DDLs
(Database Description Languages) and DABACON (the DAtaBAse CONtrol program), read
the chapter Database Management System in the Administrator User Guide.
3.1
Reconfiguration Process
Reconfiguration is a two-pass operation, acting on either a complete database or on
specified parts of one.
In the first pass, RECONFIGURER scans a named source database and copies the data
for some or all existing elements and their attributes into intermediate files.
In the second pass, the contents of the intermediate files are transferred to a specified
destination database.
This mode of operation has the following features:
•
Only existing elements are copied to the intermediate files; deleted items and corrupt
data are ignored. The destination database created from these files is therefore both
compact and uncorrupted.
•
The reference and non-reference attributes of the elements are held in different
intermediate files. The method of transfer of data to the destination database ensures
that all referencing is complete and consistent.
•
The source and destination databases may have different DDLs. This enables existing
data to be restructured to conform to a new database structure and so, for example, to
be used with a new version of PDMS.
•
Reconfiguration can used to transfer a project to different hardware. The intermediate
files produced by the first stage can be decoded into a portable format (typically ASCII),
and transferred, and then the second stage carried out.
A similar technique is used to convert whole projects to new versions of PDMS, though in
this case the intermediate files need not be decoded.
3.2
Starting up RECONFIGURER
Enter PDMS in non-graphics (tty) mode by typing:
pdms tty
Then specify the Project and User ID/Password, and enter ADMIN. For example:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
proj ABC
user SYSTEM/XXXXXX
admin
You can now start to set up the reconfiguration parameters using the commands
summarised in the Command Summary under Reconfiguration.
3.3
Administrative and Querying Commands
Some of the general PDMS and querying commands, which are particularly relevant to
reconfiguration, are summarised below.
SYSTAT
Gives information about the current active status of the
project within which you are working.
LIST
Lists project information; there are a variety of options.
SET TEAM
Sets the specified team as the current one.
LOCK, UNLOCK
Locking the System Database prevents any new users
entering the project.
MESSAGE
Sends messages to other users.
Q DB
Gives the type, number and filename of the specified DB
and a list of the MDBs of which it is a member. For example:
Q DB CIVIL/JBX37C
CIVIL/
JBX37C DESI
NUMBER 6
TVX000/TVX009
MDBS: /LAYOUT /TANKS
Q COPIES
FILENAME /
Lists all DBs which are copies of the specified DB. For
example:
Q COPIES CIVIL/JBX37C
DB CIVIL/JBX37C HAS COPIES:
CIVILl/JBX47C
Q MDB
Lists the DBs in the specified MDB.
Q TEAM
Lists the users who are members of the specified team plus
a list of the DBs owned by the team.
Q SET TEAM
Gives the name of the currently set team if any.
Q LOCK
Shows whether the project is locked.
3.4
Basic Reconfiguration
3.4.1
Reconfiguring a Single Database
The simplest reconfiguration involves a single DB which has no references into it from other
DBs; for example, a Design DB which has no associated Drawing (PADD) DBs.
A simple reconfiguration requires a source and a destination DB. When the process has
been completed, the source DB will remain unchanged, and the destination DB will contain
a compacted copy of the parts of the source which were specified in the copy list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
The transfer of data takes place in two passes, the second of which is further divided into
two phases:
PASS 1
The data is read from the source DB and written to a pair of
intermediate files. The first file holds the element structures
and the non-reference attributes, the other holds the
reference attributes.
PASS 2 - Phase 1
The first file is read by RECONFIGURER and used to
recreate the original structures in the destination DB,
including setting of the non-reference attributes.
PASS 2 - Phase 2
The second intermediate file is read and its contents used to
set all reference attributes in the destination DB and to
perform insertion operations.
The reason for the two phases is that references in the source DB may refer to elements
lower down in the hierarchy. It is necessary, therefore, to create all elements in the
destination DB before trying to set references to any of them.
Since the two passes perform independent and consecutive operations, the process can be
interrupted after Pass 1 has been completed, with Pass 2 being run later.
Reconfiguration has four basic steps:
1. Specify where the data to be reconfigured is coming FROM
2. Specify where the reconfigured data is going TO.
3. Specify which parts of the source data are to be copied to the destination.
4. Start the reconfiguration process.
3.4.2
Specifying the Source Database
The source of the data to be copied is specified using the FROM command. Some
examples of the use of FROM are:
Examples:
FROM DB STEELS/STEELS
Source data is in database STEELS/STEELS in current project
FROM PROJECT XXX STEELS/STEEL
Source data is in specified DB in project XXX
FROM DBFILE /abc016
Source data is in specified file (assumes project directory is current directory)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:3
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.4.3
Specifying the Destination DB
The destination of reconfigured data is specified using the TO command. Some examples of
the use of TO are:
Examples:
TO DB STEELS/STEELS
Reconfigured data to go to database STEELS/STEELS in current project
TO NEW HVAC/HVAC DBNO 777
Reconfigured data to go to new database USERM/DESIGN, number 777, in current
project
TO DBFILE /des008
Reconfigured data to go to specified file (assumes project directory is current
directory)
TO DB and TO DBFILE specify that the data are to be reconfigured into an existing DB,
identified by its name or that of the file containing it. The destination DB must be of the same
type as the source DB, and will normally be empty, but need be. For an explanation of what
happens when the DB is not empty, see Copying Parts of Databases.
TO NEW specifies that a new DB is to be created to receive the reconfigured data. This is
the most common option for the general compaction of DBs. It is explained further in Copies
and Reconfigured Copies of DBs.
Note: The new database will need to be added to the appropriate MDBs.
3.4.4
Specifying What Will be Copied
The RCFCOPY command specifies which parts of the source DB are to be copied to the
destination. Most commonly a whole DB is reconfigured, using the command option:
RCFCOPY ALL
The RCFCOPY ALL command copies all elements in the list part of the World element of
the source DB into the World element of the destination DB. World itself is not copied. Parts
of a database can be copied by using the RCFCOPY command followed by the name of the
element at the top of the hierarchy to be copied. Only elements that can be owned by World,
for example, Sites, can be specified. The list of elements specified by the RCFCOPY
command becomes the copy list.
Note that you must use RCFCOPY ALL if you intend to use the RECONFIGURE
SESSIONS command at the next step, as the SESSIONS option is not valid if you only carry
out partial reconfiguration.
3.4.5
Starting the Reconfiguration Process
The reconfiguration process is started by giving the command:
RECONFIGURE (minimum abbreviation RECON)
Messages are output to indicate the successful start and completion of each stage. When
the process is complete, all information concerning the source, destination, copy list and the
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:4
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
extent of information output is deleted, ready for another reconfiguration operation if
required.
You must specify the source, destination and copy list for each reconfiguration.
The output by default is sent to the screen, but you can send it to a file by giving the ALPHA
FILE command, followed by a filename, before reconfiguration.
You can use the following options with RECONFIGURE:
3.4.6
•
Use the SAMEREF option to ensure that the same reference numbers are maintained
after reconfiguration. See Using the SAMEREF Option, for details.
•
Use the SESSIONS option to ensure that the session information stays the same after
reconfiguration. See Using the SESSIONS Option for details.
Example of a Simple Reconfiguration
The following command sequence might be used to reconfigure a DB which is not
referenced by any other DBs:
FROM DB MASTER/DESIGN
TO DB MASTER/DESNEW
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
Note: In practice it would be advisable to use RCFUPDATE and DUMP in the command
sequence. See Updating References into a Reconfigured Database and Saving the
Reference Number Index.
The following messages are typical of the output during a completely successful
reconfiguration:
*** Pass one initiated ***
*** Pass one completed ***
*** Pass two initiated ***
EC
SITE
#32/202 =42/205
Phase one complete - starting phase two
*** Pass two completed ***
***Reconfiguration Completed
0 Elements were not defined in DDL
0 Elements have been lost
0 Elements are no longer named
0 Attributes were incorrectly defined
0 Elements were not inserted.
See Reconfiguration Messages, for a complete list of output messages.
3.5
Using the SAMEREF Option
When a DB is reconfigured, the reference numbers of the elements in the destination DB
will be different from the corresponding reference numbers in the source DB. To ensure that
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:5
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
the same reference numbers are maintained after reconfiguration, you can use the
command:
RECONFIGURE SAMEREF
In this case the destination DB number must be the same as the original one. This means
that you will have to delete the source database, and create a new one with the same
number.
The following example illustrates the use of the SAMEREF option:
FROM DB MASTER/DESIGN
TO FILE /F1 /F2
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
DELETE DB MASTER/DESIGN
CREATE DB MASTER/DESIGN DESI DBNO nn
FROM FILE /F1/F2
TO DB MASTER/DESIGN
RECONFIG SAMEREF
3.6
Using the SESSIONS Option
When a DB is reconfigured, by default the session information from the source DB is not
preserved. To ensure that session information such as the original session comment,
session number, username and original date stays the same after reconfiguration, you can
use the command:
RECONFIGURE SESSIONS
The option is not valid for SYSTEM, or GLOBAL DBs, and is not available for a partial
reconfiguration.
The following example illustrates the use of the SESSIONS option:
FROM DB CTBATEST/DESI
TO FILE /A /B
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
After reconfiguration, data can be read back in from the file using the existing commands,
replacing the original DB data. When reading in data, the DB number and extract number
must be the same as the originating DB number and extract number. For example:
FROM FILE /A /B
TO DB CTBATEST/DESI
RECONFIG
The SAMEREF option is assumed when reading the data. If errors occur, the data is not
saved. If you want the data saved even if errors occur, use the FORCE option. For example:
FROM FILE /A /B
TO DB CTBATEST/DESI
RECONFIG FORCE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:6
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.7
Listing the Reference Number Index
When a DB is reconfigured without the SAMEREF option, the reference numbers of the
elements in the destination DB will be different from the corresponding reference numbers in
the source DB.
An index of the reference numbers of elements in the new DB against those in the old DB is
automatically created as an essential part of the reconfiguration process. The new reference
corresponding to an old reference can be queried using the command:
Q NEWREF refno
where refno is the new reference number. The old reference number will be returned. For
example:
Q NEWREF #32/202
3.8
=42/205
Global Projects
In a Global project, you can reconfigure the System and Global databases. The commands
are:
FROM SYSTEM
RECONFIGURE
(The above command also works in a non-Global project.)
FROM GLOBAL
RECONFIGURE
In both these cases, the existing System or Global databases will be overwritten, so you do
not give a TO command. The COPY ALL and SAMEREF options are also implied.
In a Global project, you can only give a RECONFIGURE command for a System or Global
database if you are at the primary location of the database:
3.9
•
For a Global database, the primary location is the Hub.
•
For a Satellite System database, the primary location may be at the Satellite itself, or it
may be at another Satellite, or at the Hub. The RECONFIGURE command
reconfigures the currently open System database. At a Satellite, the command can
therefore operate either on the local System database, or on another Satellite’s System
database which is primary at the local Satellite.
Controlling RECONFIGURER Output
You can control the format and extent of the output produced by RECONFIGURER during
Pass 2 processing. The commands are:
VB
Very brief output mode
BRIEF
Brief output mode
FULL
Full output mode
In VB (Very Brief) mode, a message is output as each element in the copy list is
successfully created. If the copy command was RCFCOPY ALL, then a message is output
for each element successfully copied into the World of the destination DB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:7
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
In BRIEF mode, all information output in VB mode is given, plus messages describing any
errors that have occurred due to DDL changes.
In FULL mode, all information output in BRIEF mode is given, plus a log of all elements
successfully created and named. Note that FULL mode is very verbose and its use is not
generally recommended.
The default is BRIEF mode.
An upper limit may be set on the number of errors that are acceptable during Pass 2 of a
reconfiguration using the ERRORS command. For example:
ERRORS 50
If the specified limit is reached, reconfiguration is abandoned and the DB is left unaltered.
By default, RECONFIGURER allows an unlimited number of errors to occur. This situation
may be reset if necessary by using the ERRORS command followed by a negative value.
For example:
ERRORS
3.10
-1
Copies and Reconfigured Copies of DBs
There are two ways of copying a DB in PDMS, which create two different types of copy:
copies and reconfigured copies. This section explains the difference.
3.10.1
Copies
A copy of a DB can be made by using the RCFCOPY command. For example the following
command: will create a copy of the existing DB PIPEA/PIPEA in the new DB ADMIN/TEST.
RCFCOPY PIPEA/PIPEA ADMIN/TEST
The key features of copies are:
•
All copies of DBs have the same DB number. This may be seen by using the LIST
FILES command. For example:
MASTER/DES
3.10.2
DESI
NUMBER 14
FILENAME /%DRA000%/dra013 UPDATE
PIPEA/PIPEA DESI
NUMBER
2
FILENAME /%DRA000%/dra001 UPDATE
ADMIN/TEST
DESI
NUMBER
2
FILENAME /%DRA000%/dra003 UPDATE
USER/DRAFT
PADD
NUMBER
5
FILENAME /%DRA000%/dra004 UPDATE
•
There is no implied direction of copying. Thus, in the previous example, PIPEA/PIPEA
and ADMIN/TEST are each a copy of the other.
•
The contents of all copies are identical with respect to both data and structure.
•
Any given element has the same reference number in each copy.
•
A DB may have any number of copies, but copies may not exist in the same MDB.
Reconfigured Copies
A reconfigured copy is one named by the TO DB or TO NEW commands. The key features
of reconfigured copies are:
•
A reconfigured copy has a different DB number from that of the source DB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:8
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.11
•
In the reconfiguration process, the destination DB becomes a reconfigured copy of the
source DB, but the reverse is not true. The relationship exists in one direction only.
•
The contents of a reconfigured copy are an edited version of those of the source DB.
•
Any given element will have a different reference number in the reconfigured copy from
its reference number in the original DB (unless you use the same SAMEREF option).
Advanced Reconfiguration
The previous sections in this chapter describe how a single DB can be reconfigured. In a
real PDMS project, with many DBs of different types and with reference attributes pointing
from one DB to several other DBs, reconfiguration is usually a more complex process.
This section describes how one or more DBs can be reconfigured in such an environment. It
also describes how part of a DB can be reconfigured, rather than the whole DB.
Note: If the SAMEREF option is used, the reconfiguration is much simpler
3.11.1
References Between Databases
A DB often contains elements which have reference or reference array attributes which
point into other DBs. For example, one Design DB could contain a Branch connected to a
Nozzle in another Design DB. The HREF (or TREF) attribute of the Branch would point into
the second DB and the CREF attribute of the Nozzle would point back into the first DB. See
example below:
HREF /E1-N2
Branch /150-B1
DESIGN DB 1
CREF /150-B1
Nozz /E1-N2
DESIGN DB 2
Similarly, references can exist from Design DBs into Catalogue DBs (the SPREF attribute of
a piping component pointing to an SPCOM, for example), but references cannot exist from a
Catalogue DB back into a Design DB.
When a DB is reconfigured without the SAMEREF option, most of the reference numbers of
its elements will change. To maintain the integrity of pointers into the DB from other DBs,
the contents of any DB which might point to elements in the reconfigured DB are scanned
and the reference or reference array attributes are changed to point to the correct element
once more.
For example, assume that the reference number of an SPCOM in a Catalogue DB changes
from =17/3108 in the original DB to =49/2014 in the reconfigured copy. All piping
components whose SPREF attribute was previously set to =17/3108 must have SPREF
reset to =49/2014. Such components might exist in several DBs.
Reference resetting is performed by the RCFUPDATE command described in the next
section.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:9
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.11.2
Updating References into a Reconfigured Database
While a DB is being reconfigured without the SAMEREF option, RECONFIGURER builds up
an index of the reference numbers of all elements in the source DB versus their
corresponding new reference numbers in the destination DB. The RCFUPDATE command
uses this index to check reference pointers in other DBs and update them to point to the
correct elements in the reconfigured DB. Examples of the use of this command are:
Examples:
RCFUPDATE DB MASTER/DESIGN
Updates references to the reconfigured DB from DB MASTER/DESIGN.
RCFUPDATE DB MASTER/DESIGN INTERNAL
Updates references in DB MASTER/DESIGN for any elements that have been
copied with RCFCOPY ALL CONNECTIONS. Use this option with care because it is
possible to update a reference that has already been changed by the
RECONFIGURE command.
RCFUPDATE MDB /USERA
Updates all references to the reconfigured DB from DBs in MDB /USERA.
RCFUPDATE TEAM USER
Updates all references to the reconfigured DB from DBs owned by team USER.
Note: The RCFUPDATE command must be given immediately following a RECONFIGURE
operation.
As the RCFUPDATE command may cause a DB to be written to, you must have Read-Write
access to all relevant DBs. The DBs must not be in active use by any other user of the
project.
Care should be taken when reconfiguring to the same DB number. If you update a DB twice,
the resulting reference numbers could be wrong. For example:
Old reference
New reference
/VESS1
=123/456
=123/457
/VESS2
=123/457
=123/458
Thus, giving the RCFUPDATE command twice results in the reference =123/456 being reset
to =123/458.
RECONFIGURER knows which types of DB can be pointed to by reference attributes in
other types of DB, and so does not attempt to update DBs which could not possibly point to
the latest reconfigured copy. A report is output which lists which DBs were and which were
not updated.
The table of references is maintained across multiple reconfigurations, as long as you do
not exit from ADMIN.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:10
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.11.3
Saving the Reference Number Index
The RCFUPDATE command is usually given immediately after databases have been
reconfigured. The index can be saved to a file when the reconfiguration has been
completed; to be used at a later date.
The commands are DUMP to save to a file, and LOAD to load a file. For example:
LOAD /DUMP1
FROM DB MASTER/DESIGN
TO DB MASTER/DESNEW
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
DUMP /DUMP2
These commands will read an existing reference number index from file /DUMP1, add the
reference number pairs from the specified reconfiguration to it, and then write the index out
again to the file /DUMP2.
If a number of databases have been reconfigured, the dump file will record the crossreference index for all of them.
The LOAD command replaces the current index. The command LOAD APPEND appends
the table to the current index.
3.11.4
Copying Parts of Databases
The RCFCOPY ALL command copies all the elements in the source DB World into the
destination DB World. If the World of the destination DB already contains members, then the
elements from the source DB are added to these.
The RCFCOPY command can be used to define the root elements to be copied. A root
element is any element owned by the World, that is:
BLTA
CASW
CATA
CCTA
CMPW
CONW
DEPT
GPWL
LIBY
MATW
RUNW
SITE
SPWL
UNIT
UWRL
When a root element is copied, all elements owned by it are also copied. A maximum of 300
root elements may be specified in a single copy list.
The selective commands RCFCOPY CATALOGUE and RCFCOPY SPECIFICATIONS
cause the first root elements of type CATA and SPWL, respectively, to be copied from the
list part of the World in the source DB.
To copy only part of a DB, one or more root elements must be specified (by name or
reference number) in a RCFCOPY command. For example:
RCFCOPY /SITE-A SITE-7
Elements of any other types will be copied into the destination DB as NULL elements, that is
they will be created as floating elements, not owned by any higher-level element. This does
not mean that they are inaccessible. As long as such an element is named (or you know its
new reference number) it can be incorporated as a member of any suitable parent element
by using the INCLUDE command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:11
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
If you are not at a top level element, there must be an existing element in the destination DB
into whose list part you wish to incorporate the element being copied. This is done using the
INTO option of the RCFCOPY command. For example:
RCFCOPY /ZONE5A INTO /SITE-3
would copy the Zone /ZONE5A and make it the last member of the Site /SITE-3.
If the intended owning element does not already exist in the destination DB at the
beginning of Pass 2, the listed root element will not be copied. For example:
RCFCOPY /SITE-3 /ZONE5A INTO /SITE-3
is not allowed.
INTO cannot be used when the destination is FILES rather then a DB. The word AND and
the comma (,) may be used as separators to improve readability, thus:
RCFCOPY /SITE-5, /ZONE5A INTO /SITE-3, /SITE-6 AND /SITE-12
Several RCFCOPY commands can be given in sequence to add elements to the copy list.
For example, the sequence
RCFCOPY /SITE-5
RCFCOPY /ZONE5A INTO /SITE-3
RCFCOPY /SITE-6, /SITE-12
is exactly equivalent to the RCFCOPY command in the previous example.
If an element is quoted in the copy list but does not exist in the source DB, an error message
is output and the element is not copied. Since RCFCOPY commands are additive, a
correcting command may be given on the next line. For example:
RCFCOPY /SITE1 /SITE2 /SITR3 /SITE4
(24,16) SITR3 not found
(error message)
Since SITE1, SITE2 and SITE4 are already in the copy list, all that is needed to add SITE3
is:
RCFCOPY /SITE3
Note: Partial reconfiguration of PADD DBs is only allowed for picture elements (i.e. SHEE,
BACK, OVER, SYLB, LALB) and above.
Setting External References
In cases where you have made a partial copy of a database, sometimes it is necessary for
you to ensure the external references are correct in the copied elements.
For example, if you moved a piping zone to a different database while maintaining the
references to an equipment zone which was to remain it the original database, the copied
piping zone could have unset external references and the equipment zone would remain
connected to the original piping zone.
In these cases you can use the ALLCONnections option to set the external references for
the reconfigured elements:
RCFCOPY /SITE1 INTO /SITE2 ALLCONNECTIONS
This will set all references including those within the original database not in the list of
copied elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:12
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
To update the references of the original database to point to the new copied elements use
the RCFUPDATE INTERNAL command described in Updating References into a
Reconfigured Database.
3.11.5
Copying Groups
If a Group World is specified in a RCFCOPY command, only the Group World and its owned
Groups are copied. Errors will occur in Phase 2 if the Group members have not be copied
as well.
It is meaningless to try to reconfigure a group on its own.
3.12
Transferring Data Between Projects
RECONFIGURER provides a simple means of transferring data from one project to another,
on the same type of computer, provided both projects are running under the same major
version of PDMS and provided cross-referencing between DBs is considered logically.
The transfer operation in this case requires the use of the FROM FILES and TO FILES
options of the FROM and TO commands. In the simplest case, namely the transfer of the
contents of a single DB, such as a Catalogue, the following sequence of commands could
be used:
In the source project:
Example:
FROM DB /CATOLD
Specify source DB.
TO FILES /TEMP1 /TEMP2
Only pass 1 of reconfiguration to be carried out; partially reconfigured data to be
stored in named files.
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
and in the destination project:
Example:
FROM FILES /TEMP1 /TEMP2
Partially reconfigured data to be recovered from named file;
TO DB /CATNEW
pass 2 of reconfiguration to be done.
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:13
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
Note: FREE (i.e. Read/Write) access is required to both projects.
If the contents of more than one DB are to be transferred, provided no reference attributes
point outside the set of DBs being transferred, an extension of the same procedure could be
used. Consider the transfer of the whole of one Design DB, the whole of a Catalogue DB
and one item of equipment from a second Design DB, thus:
Source DB
Elements Transferred
Destination DB
CIVIL/STRUC4
Whole Design DB
STEEL/MAIN
ANSI/MASCAT
Whole Catalogue DB
CATAL/MAIN
SITE-A
One Site
EQUIP/MAIN
The reconfiguration commands should be given in the following order:
In the source project:
FROM DB ANSI/MASCAT
TO FILES /REC1A /REC1B
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
Copies the Catalogue DB first
FROM DB CIVIL/STRUC4
TO FILES /REC2A /REC2B
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIGURE
Copies the Design DB
FROM DB VESSEL/V25CT
TO FILES /REC3A /REC3B
RCFCOPY /SITE-A
RECONFIGURE
Copies the Site
and in the destination project:
FROM FILES /REC1A /REC1B
TO DB CATAL/MAIN
RECONFIGURE
Creates Catalogue DB
FROM FILES /REC2A /REC2B
TO DB STEEL/MAIN
RECONFIGURE
Creates Design DB
FROM FILES /REC3A /REC3B
TO DB EQUIP/MAIN
RECONFIGURE
Creates equipment item
RCFUPDATE DB STEEL/MAIN
RCFUPDATE DB EQUIP/MAIN
3.13
Gives correct cross-references
Upgrading a Project
The XREF and RESETXREFS commands described in this section are intended for use
during the upgrading of a project from one version of PDMS to the next. They operate on the
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:14
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
data during its transfer from the source DB to the destination DB such that the data can be
modified to conform to the requirements of a new DDL.
The commands are used to ensure that all cross-references are correctly set after a multiDB reconfiguration. They are particularly useful in the case where two databases of the
same type are referencing each other. They are also useful when copying between projects,
as an alternative to the UPDATE command. When copying between DBs with the same DB
number, it is best to use XREF and RESETXREFS.
These commands are normally handled automatically by the upgrade macros supplied with
a new version of PDMS. They may be used independently of the upgrade macros by the
experienced user, preferably after consultation with AVEVA Solutions Limited, and it is for
this reason that they are described here.
XREF may be used to generate a list of the reference numbers of all elements which need
updating for each DB. The list is created during the restructuring of the new DBs in Phase 2
of Pass 2.
This list is then used to monitor a partial updating operation, which ensures that all
references are reset into every element which has been affected by a DB reconfiguration.
The partial update is controlled by the RESETXREFS command, which is related to the
RCFUPDATE DB command. The RESETXREFS function applies only to elements whose
reference numbers appear in the corresponding XREF file.
For example:
RESETXREFS WITH /REFFILE RESOLVE DB MASTER/DESNEW
RESET /REF2 RESOL /NEWDB
Here /REFFILE is the name of the file generated by the XREF command and MASTER/
DESNEW is the corresponding DB to be updated.
In effect the RESETXREFS command opens the specified XREF file and the RESOLVE
command part initiates the appropriate update. The macro files generated by the
UPGRADE command in ADMIN ensure that the RESET filenames are correctly matched to
the corresponding RESOLVE dbnames.
Note: The XREF file only indicates those elements which need to be updated. The DUMP
files are still required in order to match the old and new reference numbers correctly.
When reconfiguring a whole project, it is impossible to order databases of the same type so
that all references are resolved as the reconfiguration proceeds. The XREF and
RESETXREFS commands are needed to tidy up the references.
Note: The UPGRADE command is used when a project is being upgraded from an earlier
version of PDMS.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:15
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
The following is an example of a sequence of commands:
Example:
TO DB XX/A2
FROM DB XX/A1
XREF /XX1
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG
:
:
TO DB XX/B2
FROM DB XX/B2
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG
RESET WITH /XX1 RESOLVE DB XX/A2
A more general command sequence for a project upgrade is shown in the following input
and output macros:
Input macro
Write ’Upgrading project CJB ’
Write ’From PDMS10 to PDMS11 ’
Write ’Input phase ’
$R6
Checkddl is 11
To db STANA/SAPROP
From files /REC1A /REC1B
Xref /REC1X
Reconfigure
To db DEREKF/DFPROP
From files /REC2A /REC2B
Xref /REC2X
Reconfigure
To db ALANC/ACPROP
From files /REC3A /REC3B
Xref /REC3X
Reconfigure
To db TAMH/THPROP
From files /REC4A /REC4B
Xref /REC4X
Reconfigure
To db TAMH/PROP_ATEST
From files /REC5A /REC5B
Xref /REC5X
Reconfigure
Reset with /REC1X
Resolve db STANA/SAPROP
Reset with /REC2X
Resolve db DEREKF/DFPROP
Reset with /REC3X
Resolve db ALANC/ACPROP
Reset with /REC4X
Resolve db TAMH/THPROP
Reset with /REC5X
Resolve db TAMH/PROP_ATEST
Finish
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:16
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
Output macro
Write ’Upgrading project CJB ’
Write ’From PDMS10 to PDMS11 ’
Write ’Output phase ’
$R6
UPGRADE ON
From db STANA/SAPROP
To files /REC1A /REC1B
Copy all
Reconfigure
From db DEREKF/DFPROP
To files /REC2A /REC2B
Copy all
Reconfigure
From db ALANC/ACPROP
To files /REC3A /REC3B
Copy all
Reconfigure
From db TAMH/THPROP
To files /REC4A /REC4B
Copy all
Reconfigure
From db TAMH/PROP_ATEST
To files /REC5A /REC5B
Copy all
Reconfigure
3.14
Reconfiguration Messages
During the various stages of the reconfiguration process, messages will be output. This is
particularly so during Pass 2, in which the data from the intermediate files is used to
reconstruct the element hierarchy in the destination DB.
In the simplest case these messages will just indicate the start and finish of each phase, and
confirm that all elements and their attributes were correctly placed. In a more complex case
it is probable that a number of error messages will also be output, indicating potential
problems in building up an unambiguous structure in the new DB.
3.14.1
Standard Information Messages
The progress-monitoring messages, which indicate the stages reached during the
reconfiguration, are self-explanatory. They are:
*** Pass one initiated ***
*** Pass one completed ***
*** Pass two initiated ***
:
*** Pass two completed ***
***Reconfiguration Completed
After the reconfiguration has been completed, a summary of any problems found during
Pass 2. This will contain zero values where no problems were found.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:17
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
The format of this report is:
Integer
Elements were not defined in the DDL
Integer
Elements have been lost
Integer
Elements are no longer named
Integer
Attributes where incorrectly defined
Integer
Elements were not inserted
where integer is the relevant number.
3.14.2
General Format of Pass 2 Error Messages
In addition to the standard information messages described above, a range of error
messages may be generated during Pass 2. These messages have the general format:
CODE TYPE OLDREF NEWREF NAME
although some parts of this may be omitted.
For example:
EN
EQUIP
#10/21
=12/12 /NEWNAME
#EAE SHEE
#88/842 =16/2417 /DR1/S5
*ENID
SITE
#15/23
The individual parts of the message are:
3.14.3
CODE:
Identifies the nature of a message arising from the creation or naming of
an element. The codes used are detailed in the next section.
TYPE:
The type of element, e.g. SITE, BRAN, SHEE etc.
OLDREF
The reference number of the element in the source DB (starting with ‘#’).
NEWREF:
The reference number of the corresponding element created in the
destination DB (starting with ‘=’). This will be blank if the element could
not be created.
NAME:
The name given to the element. This applies only if the message is
coded ‘EN’ to indicate that the element has been named (see next
section).
Codes Used to Identify Message Types
The coded prefix to each message comprises two parts. The first character is one of the
following:
•
A space indicates information rather than an error
•
An asterisk (*) indicates an error concerning the creation or naming of an element
•
A hash (#) indicates an error concerned with an attribute
The remaining characters, which give more explicit meaning to the message, are explained
in the following subsections.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:18
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
Information-only Messages (prefix: space)
There are two possible codes:
EC
Element Created
EN
Element Named
These are output as the reconfiguration proceeds and each message ends with the name of
the copied element.
Error Messages Relating to Elements (prefix: asterisk)
*ENID
Elements Not In DDL
The element could not, therefore, be created. This can occur when the element type is not
permitted in the list part of the element above it in the DB hierarchy, for example, if an
attempt is made to reconfigure FROM FILES into a DB of the wrong type.
*ENI
Element Not Inserted
An attempt was made to insert the element into a list where it is no longer permitted.
*EL
Element Lost
Elements in the list part of ones that cannot be created are lost, since they cannot be
created either.
Error Messages Relating to Attributes (prefix: hash sign)
These all begin with
#EAE
Element Attribute Error
followed by one or more other messages giving more information about the error.
3.15
Database Transfers between Computers
Note: The hardware platforms currently supported allow binary compatibility of databases,
and so the information in this section will not usually be needed.
RECONFIGURER can be used for the transfer of PDMS DBs between different computers,
which may be of different types. Because reconfiguration is a two-pass operation, the data
can be copied from one computer and read back into a different one.
The transfer operation is essentially an extension of the procedure for copying data between
projects, described in Transferring Data Between Projects. RECONFIGURER makes
provision for translating the coding of the intermediate files to ensure compatibility between
the language requirements of different computers.
An alternative method of transferring data between different computers is to use the
OUTPUT command in DESIGN, DRAFT, PARAGON or LEXICON. For details of other data
transfer methods, see the DESIGN Reference Manual Part 1 (OUTPUT command).
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:19
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.16
Binary and Character Files
Data can be stored in two formats:
•
Binary files are in a compact machine-readable form, but are generally specific to a
particular type of computer.
•
Character files (which are usually in ASCII code) generally have to be much larger to
hold the same amount of information, but are human-readable. Character files can be
transferred relatively easily between different types of computers.
PDMS DBs are stored as binary files so that large amounts of data can be held efficiently.
RECONFIGURER provides a means to convert PDMS DBs from binary files into character
files and vice versa.
3.17
Transfer Process
The files used by the transfer process are not the PDMS DBs themselves but the (binary)
intermediate files created by Pass 1 of a reconfiguration. These are converted into larger,
but easily transportable, character files by the TO FORMATTEDFILES command. The files
can then be transferred to the target machine via a communications network or magnetic
tape and converted back into Pass 1 temporary file format by the FROM
FORMATTEDFILES command. For example:
On source machine:
FROM DB MASTER/DESI
TO FORM /F1 /F2
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG
On destination machine:
FROM FORM /F1 /F2
TO DB MASTER/DESI
RECONFIG
3.18
Reconfiguring a Global Project
We recommend that you use the SAMEREF option when reconfiguring a Global project. We
also recommend that there are no users in the database at the primary location when
reconfiguring back to the SAMEREF database.
Databases can only be reconfigured at their primary locations.
Note that when a project database is reconfigured, the database sessions will effectively be
lost. Thus the ability for Global to send only session changes is lost as well. When the next
update occurs between locations, the entire database will be sent via the Global daemon.
This can take some time if the database is large.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:20
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
3.19
Reconfiguring Extracts
3.19.1
Outputting Changes Only
The default for reconfiguration is that, when reconfiguring an extract, only changes made in
the extract are output. To output all elements, as in normal reconfiguration, the keyword
FULL must be added to the RECONFIGURE command line. For example:
RECONFIG FULL
3.19.2
The SAMEREF Option
The SAMEREF option is always used for extracts. You need not to enter the SAMEREF
option; it is assumed.
This means that you can not reconfigure to DBs of a different DB number.
3.19.3
The SESSIONS Option
The SESSIONS option is always used for extracts. You need not enter the SESSIONS
option; it is assumed.
3.19.4
Reconfiguring a Single Extract
The procedure for reconfiguring a single leaf extract is as follows:
1. Reconfigure from the DB to a file.
2. REVERT the extract to Session 1.
3. MERGE CHANGES to remove the intermediate session.
4. Reconfigure from the file to a DB.
An alternative strategy would be to replace Steps 2 and 3 by a DB deletion and a DB
creation.
The procedure is similar for single extracts that own other extracts. The only difference is:
3.19.5
•
The MERGE CHANGES command will leave sessions referred to by child extracts.
Thus, the resultant file will be larger than it would have been had there been no extract
children.
•
The alternative approach of deleting and recreating the extract is not possible unless all
child extracts are also deleted and recreated.
•
The Master DB should be reverted to Session 2 rather than Session 1.
Reconfiguring a Family of Extracts
When reconfiguring a whole extract family, the following considerations apply:
•
The REVERT/MERGE operation must be done bottom-up, to minimise the number of
sessions kept.
•
Reconfiguring from databases to files must be done top-down.
•
Reconfiguring back from files to databases must also be done top-down, and you must
complete the reconfiguration for the whole extract. For example, if you reconfigure all
three database levels of a three level extract to files but only reconfigure the top two file
levels back to databases, the third database will be corrupted due to the
reconfiguration of the other two. Refer to Example of Reconfiguring a Three Level
Extract for more information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:21
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
•
Before reconfiguring out from a file, refresh the extract.
•
Before reconfiguring in from a file, the extract must be refreshed from its parent.
For example, given a simple two-level extract containing TEAMA/MASTER, TEAMA/
EXTRACT, the sequence would be:
1. Refresh TEAMA/EXTRACT.
2. Reconfigure TEAMA/MASTER to file /A, /B.
3. Reconfigure TEAMA/EXTRACT to file /C, /D.
4. REVERT TEAMA/EXTRACT to Session 1.
5. MERGE CHANGES on TEAMA/EXTRACT.
6. REVERT TEAMA/MASTER to Session 2.
7. MERGE CHANGES on TEAMA/MASTER.
8. Reconfigure from file /A, /B to TEAMA/MASTER.
9. Refresh TEAMA/EXTRACT (to pick up changes made in Step 8).
10. Reconfigure from file /C, /D to TEAMA/EXTRACT.
3.19.6
The RCFUPDATE Command
When the RCFUPDATE command is used on an extract, all affected attributes will be
updated regardless of whether or not the element has been claimed to the extract. This
means that, if many extracts of the same extract family are updated, the same changes will
be made to each of the extracts.
3.19.7
Example of Reconfiguring a Three Level Extract
Consider this three-level extract:
All databases must be reconfigured to files first and then reconfigured from the files to the
databases, in the order; MASTER, EXT, EXTBOT. If this sequence of operations is not
completed, then databases will be corrupted. For example, if EXTBOT is not reconfigured
from file, then EXTBOT will be corrupted as a result of the reconfiguration of the other two
databases. It is therefore suggested that you make backups of databases before
reconfiguring them.
The sequence of commands to reconfigure the above three level extract could therefore be:
Note: The REFRESH, REVERT and MERGE CHANGES commands have not been shown
below.
FROM DB CTBATEST/MASTER
TO FILE /MASTERA /MASTERB
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:22
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
FROM DB CTBATEST/EXT
TO FILE /EXTA /EXTB
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
FROM DB CTBATEST/EXTBOT
TO FILE /EXTBOTA /EXTBOTB
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
FROM FILE MASTERA /MASTERB
TO DB CTBATEST/MASTER
RECONFIG
FROM FILE EXTA /EXTB
TO DB CTBATEST/EXT
RECONFIG
FROM FILE EXTBOTA /EXTBOTB
TO DB CTBATEST/EXTBOT
RECONFIG
It is not necessary for the reconfiguration back from file to be done within the same session
of RECONFIGURER. For example, in a global project where MASTER, EXT and EXTBOT
are primary at different locations, then the following sequence could be followed:
1. At location A (primary location for MASTER):
FROM DB CTBATEST/MASTER
TO FILE /MASTERA /MASTERB
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
2. At location B (primary location for EXT):
FROM DB CTBATEST/EXT
TO FILE /EXTA /EXTB
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
3. At location C (primary location for EXTBOT):
FROM DB CTBATEST/EXTBOT
TO FILE /EXTBOTA /EXTBOTB
RCFCOPY ALL
RECONFIG SESSIONS
Steps 1 to 3, reconfiguring from databases to files, can be done in parallel.
4. At location A (primary location for MASTER):
FROM FILE /MASTERA /MASTERB
TO DB CTBATEST/MASTER
RECONFIG
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:23
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Reconfiguration
The user must now propagate the whole database to locations (B) and (C).
5. At location B (primary location for EXT)
FROM FILE /EXTA /EXTB
TO DB CTBATEST/EXT
RECONFIG
The user must now propagate the whole database to locations (C) and (A).
6. At location C (primary location for EXTBOT)
FROM FILE /EXTBOTA /EXTBOTB
TO DB CTBATEST/EXTBOT
RECONFIG
The whole database will be propagated to locations (A) and (B) automatically.
Steps 4 to 6, reconfiguring from files to databases, should be done consecutively.
3.19.8
Reconfiguring the Transaction Database in a Global Project
The Global Daemon stores most of the commands that it is asked to perform at a location in
a transaction database. Each location has its own transaction database. For details, see
Transaction Database.
If a transaction database becomes corrupt, it may be necessary to reconfigure it. For
information about this, refer to Running Global Projects.
Note: The daemon for a location must be stopped before reconfiguring its transaction
database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:24
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
4
System and Global Projects
This chapter describes how ADMIN elements and their attributes, in a System database
differ when a Global project is used.
You can navigate to the elements in the System and Global databases, and query their
members and attributes in the normal way.
A full list of Elements and their Attributes is included in the Data Model Reference Manual.
Session information is stored separately in the COMMs database; and the MISC database
stores inter-db macros and messages. The communications world element in the COMMs
database contains the project lock. This may be set or cleared using LOCK and UNLOCK
syntax.
When you use the MAKE GLOBAL command to make a standard project into a global
project, the Standard System database is split into two new database files; the Global
database and the (local) System database.
A modified sysvir.dat virgin database is used to upgrade the System database file xxxsys,
where xxx is the 3-character project code. The communications world element LCOMW is
added. The glbvir.dat database template file is used to create the Global database file
xxxglb.
The existence of the xxxglb database file shows that the project is global.
The following elements are added:
•
The communications world element LCOMW
•
The Global Locations world element GLOCW, which will own GRPLI elements which in
turn own GRP elements
•
The Global Team World element GTMWL
•
The Global Stamp World element GSTWLD. If stamps exist in the System database,
they are all copied to the Global Stamp World element and deleted from the System
database.
The attributes of these elements and their members, and the changes to other ADMIN
database elements which occur when a Project is made Global, are described in the
following pages.
The Global database contains information that is common to all Locations running a Global
project. The Global database is readable at all locations but is it can only be written to at the
Hub. Changes to the Global database are propagated to all the other Locations. This means
that the Global database is the same at every Location, except during the short time
changes are being propagated.
Each local System Database contains project information that is specific to the Location.
The local administrator can write to the local system Database. A local System database is
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
similar to the System database in a non-global Project. The main difference is that some of
the standard ADMIN elements will be redundant. The differences are described below.
Session information is stored separately in the COMMs database; and the MISC database
stores inter-db macros and messages. The Comms and Misc databases are local to each
Location.
The communications world element in the COMMs database contains the project lock and
isolation flags. The project lock may be set or cleared using LOCK and UNLOCK; and the
Isolation flag may be set true or false using ISOLATION syntax. Both lock and isolation may
be set or queried remotely by the Hub or an administering location.
4.1
Structure of the Local System Database
The Local System database contains the data for local Fonts, Modules, Users, MDBs, DB
Sets, Scopes and ACRs: these elements correspond to those that existed in the System
database of a Standard project. The communications data is held in a new LCOMW
Location Communications world element. The Team World and Role Worlds still exist in the
local System database, but they are empty. The Team data is stored in the Global Team
World element GTMWL in the Global database, and the Role data is stored in the Global
Role World.
The TEAM and USER elements in the Standard System database cross-reference each
other, that is each team element holds a list USLI of users belonging to the team and each
user element holds a list TMLI of teams to which the user belongs. In the Global database, a
Team does not maintain a USLI list of users belonging to it.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Note: This means that a report of all Users at every Location in the Project can only be
obtained by combining reports from each Location.
The TMLI list in the USER element in the Local System database will continue to provide a
list of teams to which a user at a particular location belongs.
In the same way that a TEAM element no longer maintains a list of users in that team, a DB
element in a team does not maintain a list of MDBs to which the DB belongs. The MDB
element, in the Local System database keeps a list of DBs belonging to it.
The detailed changes to the elements and attributes are described below.
STAT Element
This element already exists in the Local System database, but certain attributes have been
relocated to the Global System database. The attributes are the same as in a Standard
Project with the addition of:
Locrf
text(120)
120 character text:
current Location Reference
Note: When a location is created, the LOCRF attribute in its local system DB will be set to
the reference of its LOC location element in the global system database.
LCOMW Element
The Location Communications World element LCOMW is called /*LC. It contains elements
that describe the communications between one Location and all the other Locations with
which it can communicate. The LCOMW element owns a LCOMC element, LCOML
elements and LCTIML elements.
LCOMC Element
The LCOMC element contains general details about the configuration of the Admin daemon
at the current location. There should be only one LCOMC element in the database.
Attributes:
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/*LC
Logfn
/filenam
Logms
false
Loglv
0
Log file name
Diagnostic level
LCOML Element
The LCOML element contains a list of LCOMD elements, each of which specifies details
about the communications link between the current site and one other site, as described
below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:3
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Attributes:
Name
/name
Type
LCOML
Lock
false
Owner
/*LC
LCOMD Element
The LCOMD element contains specific details about the communications link between the
current site and one other site, and controls scheduled updates. There will be one LCOMD
element for each location, which has a communications link with the current location.
Attributes:
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/name
Description
unset
120 character text
Locrf
/name
Name of Location which has comms link with current
Location
Timer
frequency of update events 120 character text:
(See below)
Times
0
Time window start
Timee
2400
Time window end
Timei
30
Interval in seconds between communication attempts
Timeo
10
Number of re-tries
Execb
unset
120 character text: name of script to be run before
updates are transferred (optional)
Execa
unset
120 character text: name of script to be run after
updates are transferred (optional)
LNoUpd
false
If set TRUE, the scheduled update is disabled. This
is useful during certain house-keeping operations
such as merging.
The Timer values are:
Minutes past the hour
0 - 59
Hours
0 - 23
Days
1 - 31
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:4
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Months
1 - 12
Days of the week
0 (Sunday) - 6
For example:
Timer '0,30 * * * *'
specifies every half hour, every day.
Timer '12 10,12,14,16,18 * * 1,5 '
specifies 12 minutes past the hours given, Monday
to Friday.
The attributes TIMES and TIMEE are not implemented at this release.
Files such as Isodraft external plot files are not propagated automatically by the global
daemon. However, there is a mechanism in the daemon to allow such files to be transferred
to and from neighbouring locations, during scheduled updates (or the UPDATE ALL
command). The directory to receive transferred files is defined by the environment variable
%IMPORT%. Each location to which files are to be transferred requires its own transfer
directory - %EXP_ABC% for location ABC. Transfer of other data is described more fully in
the Global User Guide.
Offline locations: Note that transfer of such files to or from offline locations must be done
manually.
LCTIML Element
The LCTIML element is present in a Global project only and has the following functions:
•
It overrides the default transaction event timings.
•
It contains a LEVENL attribute, which sets the time interval for the event loop for all
locations, in seconds.
•
It contains attributes that control the frequency of automatic merges on the transaction
database.
•
It contains a list of LCTIMD elements, each of which specifies details about the event
timings between the current site and one other site, as described below.
Attributes:
Levenl
5
Time interval for event loop (secs)
Lmerti
Frequency of Automerges. 120 character text:
(settings as for Timer above)
Lmersu
3
Time in days after which successful commands
should be deleted. The value -1 means no deletion.
Lmerfa
3
Time in days after which failed commands should be
deleted. The value -1 means no deletion.
Lmerdl
false
If true, transaction database is merged and purged at
specified times.
At times specified by LMERTI, the transaction database will automatically be merged and
commands deleted as specified by the LMERSU and LMERFA attributes. The LMERDL
attribute must be set to true. For example, the automerge data could be set as follows:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:5
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
•
LMerti ’59 23 * * 3,6’
•
LMersu 10
•
Lmerfa -1
•
Lmerdl true
In this example, the daemon would delete all successful commands older than 10 days and
merge the transaction database. Failed commands would not be deleted.
Note: If both LMERSU and LMERFA are set to -1, then the transaction database will not be
merged.
LCTIMD Element
The LCTIMD element contains details about the event timings between the current site and
one other site. There will be one LCTIMD element for each location that communicates with
the current location.
Attributes
4.2
Name
/name
Description
unset
120 character text
Locrf
/name
Reference to Location communicating with current
Location
Lendti
604800
Command timeout period, in seconds
(default is 7 days in seconds)
Lmaxtr
100
Maximum number of retries to send command
Ltimei
120
Time interval between retries, in seconds
Structure of the Global Database
The Global System database contains Teams, Databases, Roles, Locations and Stamps.
Figure 4:1.: Structure of the Global System Database shows the structure of the Global
System database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:6
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
WORLD
World
/*GS
GSTAT
Global Status
World
GRPLI
Group List
GRP
Groups
/*GL
GLOCWL
Location World
LOCLI
Location
List
/*GT
GTMWL
Global
Team World
/*GST
GSTWLD
Global
Stamp
World
ROLE
Roles
TEAM
Teams
STAMP
Stamps
PEROP
Perops
DBLI
DB List
STLST
Stamp
List
/*GRO
GROLW
Global
Role World
LNKLI
Links List
LOC
Locations
LNK
Links
DB
DBs
DBLOC
Figure 4:1.
Structure of the Global System Database
GSTAT Element (GSTAT)
Only one /*GS element can exist in the database and it is inherited from the STAT element
in the Standard System Database.
Attributes
Name
/*GS
Lock
false
Owner
/*
Prjnumber
unset
Maxusers
999999
Prjdesc
unset
Charset
-370086
Hccnt
Extract list changes count
Naccnt
Non additive changes count
Clccnt
Change list changes count
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Project number:
17 character text
Project description 120 character text
4:7
Integer =< 999999
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
GTMWL Element
The Global Team World element GTMWL is named /*GT. Only one /*GT element can exist in
the database. It is the same as the TMWL element, except that:
•
It does not own a user list element USLI.
•
The DB element does not own an MDB list element MDBL.
•
The DB element owns a single DBLOC element DBLOC.
Attributes
Name
/*GT
Lock
false
Owner
/*
TEAM Element
Attributes
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/*GT
Description
unset
Database List Element (DBLI)
Attributes
Name
/name
Type
DBLI
Lock
false
Owner
/name
DB Element
The DB element owns the list element DBLOC which holds four additional attributes (see
DBLOC Element). These attributes are attached to the DBLOC element to facilitate
separate claiming of both this element and the owning DB element. This scheme reduces
the contention between the PDMS ADMIN module and the Global daemon.
Attributes
Name
/name
Type
DB
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:8
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Lock
false
Owner
/name
Stype
DESI
Fino
n
File number
Area
0
Area number
Daccess
Update
Claimdb
Explicit or Implicit if Daccess is Multiwrite
Description
unset
Proj
unset
Fcpyref
Nulref
Bcpyref
Nulref
Extractno
n
Variant
false
Controlled
false
DBLC
List of locations to which DB is allocated
PRMLOC
Primary Location
ISDRDB
Does DB have drawing files
DBLNKP
The DBLNKP pseudo attribute will return TRUE is both Project and
Database have propagation of linked documents enabled.
(except for Foreign DBs, where it is set to the project
code)
DBLOC Element
Attributes
Name
/name
Type
DBLOC
Lock
false
Owner
/name
DB element
Locrf
/name
Name of Primary Location
Prvrf
Name of previous
Primary Location (normally unset)
Propg
true
Propagation flag
Picfd
false
Picture file propagation flag
DEALDB
Ref Array Indicates locations where db is being de-allocated
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:9
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Hccnt
Extract list changes count = <999999
Naccnt
Non additive changes count
Clccnt
Changes list changes count
NOLNKP
false
If true propagation of linked documents is disabled
for the database.
Global Role World (GROLW)
The Global Role World Element stores the ROLE elements in a Global project.
Attributes
Name
/*GRO
Lock
false
Owner
/*
LACR
false
Sets Data Access Control on or off
Role Element (ROLE)
Attributes
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/*T
Description
unset
120 character text
Perop Element (PEROP)
Attributes
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/name
Opcreate
ignore
Opmodify
ignore
Opdelete
Ignore
Opclaim
ignore
Opissue
ignore
Opdrop
ignore
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:10
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Opoutput
ignore
Opexport
ignore
Opcopyfrom
ignore
Eclass
unset
Element Class
Aclass
unset
Attribute Class
Condition
unset
Acrmessage
unset
GLOCWL Element
The Global Location World element GLOCWL specifies information about Locations,
Groups and Communications (Links). It is named /*GL and only one /*GL element can exist
in the database. The GLOCWL element consists of the three list elements GRPLI for
groups, LOCLI for locations and LNKLI for links. It has the following attributes:
Attributes
Name
/*GL
Lock
false
Owner
/*
Aduuid
text
Daemon version string (Project UUID)
Hubrf
/name
Hub Location Reference
Prvrf
Nulref
Previous Hub Reference (normally unset)
NxtHb
Nulref
Next Hub location (normally unset)
Newuid
text
gets new UUID value to use when setting ADUUID.
To be used when a Global project is copied directly
without the REPLICATE command (see REPLICATE
(Project definition)) having been used.
GLINKP
false
To enable Link Propagation, the GLINKP attribute
must be set to TRUE.
GRPLI Element
The GRPLI element contains a list of Group elements GRP. A Group is a fully connected
local network of Locations which conceptually form a single node in the Plant Design
Global-tree structure of Locations.
Attributes
Name
/name
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:11
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Lock
false
Owner
/*GL
GRP Element
The characteristics of each group are defined by a GRP element which has the following
attributes:
Attributes
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/name
Description
unset
Membership of a group is indicated by the attribute GRPRF in each location element LOC,
as described below. The location elements LOC are themselves listed in the LOCLI
element.LOCLI Element
The LOCLI element contains a list of all Location elements LOC, including offline Locations
and those which belong to Groups.
Attributes
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/*GL
LOC Element
The characteristics of each Location are defined by a LOC element which has a set of
attributes and a secondary list element DBALL. The DBALL element is a complete list of all
Databases allocated to the Location. It is implemented as a Dabacon secondary list of DB
reference numbers which refer to DB elements under the DBLI list element of TEAM
elements.
Locations which belong to a Group have an attribute GRPRF holding the reference number
of the Group. If this attribute is null then the Location does not belong to a group. LOC
elements also possess a LOCRF attribute which points to the parent of the Location. This
attribute is used to determine paths between Locations in the proposed tree structure for
connecting Locations.
In a future implementation, based on a more general graph structure, the LOCRF attribute
might either be dropped or used for another purpose. A Location is only recognised as fully
initialised when the logical attribute LINIT is true. Other attributes of a Location are
described in the following table.
The LOC element has the following attributes:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:12
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
Attributes
Name
/name
Lock
false
Owner
/name
Description
unset
120 character text
Locid
XXX
3-letter identifier
Rhost
rhost name
host name
Iconn
1
Connection type:
1 = on-line
0 = off-line
Linit
false
Initialisation flag
Grprf
Nulref
Group reference set if Location is added to a
Group
Locrf
/name
Parent Location
PRMRF
Primary location of system Database. If unset, (and PRVRF is unset)
the Satellite will be administered locally .
PRVRF
Nulref
Old primary location (normally unset)
DEALAL
false
Indicates that ALL DBs are currently being deallocated from this location.
CURLOC
True current Location (available everywhere)
ADMLOC
Currently administered location (available everywhere).
PRMLOC
Primary location of its system db
DBPRIMARY
(ref array) - List of Databases primary at the current location.
LOCPRIMARY
(ref array) - List of Locations primary at the current location.
DBALL
List of Databases allocated to this location.
NoExtCreation
default false
If true, disables the creation of extracts by this
location. Extract creation must be done by the Hub
(or an authorised administering location)
LCpOvWrite
default false
If true, database files which are locked by dead
users may be overwritten if an update requires an
entire file copy.
Note: When a Global Project is created an initial Location element is created with a NAME
of /PROJECTHUB and a LOCID of ‘HUB’. Its LINIT flag is set to TRUE.
Note: Do not allow locked files in the current project to be overwritten during copying by
Global updates if other projects are using the current project as a foreign one. This is
because database readers in the other projects are valid users even though they are
not recorded as users in the current project.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:13
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
System and Global Projects
DBALL Element
Attributes
Lock
false
Owner
/name
LNKLI Element
The LNKLI element contains a list of link elements LNK which specify the connections
between pairs of Locations. Not used at this release.
Attributes
Name
/name
Type
LNKLI
Lock
false
Owner
/*GL
LNK Element
Not used at this release.
Attributes
Name
/name
Description
unset
120 character text
LNKRX
LINKRY
LINKWV
GSTWLD Element
Any existing stamps in the standard System database are copied to the Global Stamp World
element and deleted from the System database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:14
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
5
Transaction Database
This chapter is applicable to Global Projects only.
The Global Daemon stores most of the commands that it is asked to perform in a
transaction database. The System Administrator can use this database to get information
about the progress of commands, and investigate why commands have failed. (Use
GETWORK to see the latest changes to the transaction database)
This chapter describes the structure of the transaction database, and explains the function
of the elements within it, and their attributes.
Note: To avoid data consistency errors, PDMS changes to the transaction database should
not be made whilst the daemon is running. This includes deleting commands
(TRINCOs) and merging the database. (Using Global Merging (syntax REMOTE
MERGE) is OK.)
5.1
Structure of the Transaction Database
The hierarchical structure of the transaction database is shown in Figure 5:1.: Structure of
the Transaction Database.
All the owner/child relations are one to many with the exception of TRMLST, TRFLST, and
TRSLST. There is only one of each below an operation (TROPER) or output command
(TROUCO) or an input command (TRINCO).
There is no distinction between commands received from other locations (foreign) or from
the local location as there are no fundamental differences between them. Whether they are
local or foreign is determined by their position in the hierarchy and their owner’s names.
The structure is a hierarchy leading to input commands received by the daemon, and the
operations these have evaluated to.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
%TRMSG
%TRYEAR
%TRMONT
%TRDAY
%TRUSER
%TRLOC
%TRINCO
%TROPER
%TROUCO
%TRSLST
%TRFLST
%TRSUCC
%TRFAIL
%TRMLST
%TRSUCC
Figure 5:1.
5.2
%TRMESS
%TRFAIL
Structure of the Transaction Database
TRMSGW Element
The Transaction Message World element is called /*MS. There is only one such element
and it contains elements that store the communication between the daemon, PDMS and
other daemons. It owns any number of TRYEAR elements.
Attributes
NAME
Text
TRSETL
Logical Controls whether Local claim commands are stored
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
/*MS
5:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
5.3
TRYEAR, TRMONT and TRDAY Elements
These are organisation elements to allow the commands stored in the transaction database
to be grouped by the date on which they were received. Each of these elements only has a
single attribute NAME that is of the form:
•
Name of %TRYEAR - year number. For example, /2001
•
Name of %TRMONT - as for year, then slash and month. For example, /2001/MAY
•
Name of %TRDAY - as for TRMONT, followed by slash then date. For example, /2001/
MAY/21
TRYEARs own TRMONTs, TRMONTs own TRDAYs and TRDAYs own TRUSERs.
5.4
TRUSER and TRLOC Elements
These are further organisational elements under which commands are stored as issued by
a specific user (TRUSER) and from a particular location (TRLOC). They each only have
NAME attributes.
A given transaction database will have a structure containing the TRDAY element for any
date on which input commands were received. This will own a TRUSER element for each of
the PDMS users that have issued daemon commands on that day. These will own a single
TRLOC element with the name of the local location (e.g. CAM). There is only one TRLOC
because the PDMS user only sends commands to the local daemon.
The TRDAY may also own a TRUSER for the local and remote daemons (LOCALDAEMON
and REMOTEDAEMON). These will own TROUCO commands received using RPC from
other locations. These will own TRLOC elements for each location from which an input
command has been received. LOCALDAEMON will own a TRLOC for the local location
(e.g. CAM) since operations can send commands to the local site.The final system
TRUSER element is named …/TIMEDUPDATES with a single TRLOC of the local site. This
contains commands issued to process the regular timed updates.
5.5
TRINCO Element (Input Command)
The TRINCO element stores the information about an input command issued to the daemon
from a user, or another location’s daemon. The information includes the state of processing
of the command and is sufficient for the command to be restarted when a daemon is
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:3
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
restarted, and is sufficient to generate the operations and output commands necessary to
execute the command.
Note: Local commands added from PDMS, that is those with TRLOCL True, do not contain
successes, failures or messages.
Attributes
NAME
text
Not automatically generated
TRCNUM
int
Command number
INCSTA
int
The state of processing of the TRINCO
COMUID
ref
This is the reference of the command that sent this command
to the daemon. For commands sent by this or other daemons it
is the ref of the TROUCO element at the relevant location. For
commands originating from PDMS it will be set to null.
TRMODU
int
Module number through with the USER has issued this
command, or GLOBALDAEMON module
TRLOCL
log
True if command stored directly by PDMS independent of the
Daemon
COMSTR
text
Command string USER entered that generate this command,
else null
ORILOC[3]
text
Original Location where user issued the command
DESLOC3]
text
Ultimate target - destination location where command will be
executed. For some commands this is the destination of
subsidiary commands to be sent, not this command itself.
PRVLOC[3]
text
Previous Location which passed the command on to this
location (normally the same as the TRLOC element)
AUXLOC[3]
text
Auxiliary location. Often used as a location to send auxiliary
commands
SYSLOC[3]
text
Location of administrator when being remotely administered,
else NULL
DEPCOU
int
number of other TRINCOs on which this is dependent (always
zero)
DEPEND[*]
ref
References of TRINCOs on which it is dependent, (always
none)
DEPTYP[*]
log
Type of dependencies - on success or failure
DATECR
date
Date command received and recreated
DATEAK
date
Date sent acknowledgement for command
NACKN
int
Number of times acknowledgement sent
EXTIME[4]
text
Time to execute command (hence allows a delay) -
DATERD
date
Date command made ready (after EXTIME has been reached)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:4
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
DATECM
date
Date command completed
DATERP
date
Date reply sent with results of command
NREPLY
int
Number of times reply sent
MSTEXT
text
text info set on completion (normally only if failed to generate
operations)
TRPASS
log
True if command succeeded, false if failed. The command fails
if any of its operations fail, or if it fails to generate operations
DATEND
date
Date all processing of command finished - acknowledgement
of command received, or command cancelled.
NREPAK
int
Number of times reply acknowledgement received
USERST
text
user cancelling the command
TRDBRF
ref
of Database DB element
TRFINO
int
file number of DB element
TREXTN
int
extract number of DB element
TRAREA
int
area number of DB element
TRSTYP
int
filetype of DB element
TRDBNO
int
dbnumber of DB element
TRDACC
int
access type of DB element
INARCO
int
argument count for intargs (args of the command) (defaulted to
zero.)
INTARG[*]
int
Command arguments (passed around as a Conformant array)
TRCARG[*]
text
Command argument
‘NAME=X/Y’
TRVISI
log
Visible or not
DESC[256]
text
User description
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:5
qualifiers
space
separated.
e.g.
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
Values of INCSTA State Attribute and Order of Change
5.6
RECEIVED
The command has been received ready for processing.
DATECR is set.
ACKNOWLEDGED
An acknowledgement has been sent off by this daemon.
DATEAK is set and NACKN incremented.
STALLED
The command has failed to create its operations and state
will later return to ACKNOWLEDGED ready for retry, or to
TIMEDOUT.
READY
The command has reached its execute time and is
independent. DATERD is set.
COMPLETE
The command has been processed, and results obtained.
DATECM is set.
REPLIED
The daemon has sent the results back to the originating
location. DATERP is set and NREPLY incremented.
PROCESSED
An acknowledgement for the result received from originating
location. DATEND is set and NREPAK incremented.
REDUNDANT
The command will not be executed now due to dependency
rules. DATEND is set.
CANCELLED
The command has been cancelled and finished with
TRPASS false. DATEND is set.
TIMEDOUT
The command has timed out before creating its operations
and finished with TRPASS false. DATEND is set.
TROUCO Element (Output Command)
The TROUCO element contains information about an output command to be issued by the
daemon to itself, or to the daemon at another location. The information includes the state of
processing of the command and is sufficient for the command to be resent when a daemon
is restarted.
Output commands are generated by an input command when operations are created. They
may be destined to be executed at this, or another site.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:6
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
Attributes
NAME
text
Not automatically generated.
TRCNUM
int
Command number of command being sent.
OUTSTA
int
State of processing of the TROUCO.
COMREF
ref
Ref of the TRINCO of this command stored in the receiving
location transaction database. This is NULL until an
acknowledgement is received.
ORILOC[3]
text
Original Location where user issued the command.
DESLOC3]
text
Ultimate target - destination location where command will be
executed. For some commands this is the destination of
subsidiary commands to be sent, not this command itself.
PRVLOC[3]
text
Previous Location which passed the command on to this
location (normally the same as the TRLOC element).
AUXLOC[3]
text
Auxiliary location. Often used as a location to send auxiliary
commands.
SYSLOC[3]
text
Location of administrator when being remotely administered,
else NULL.
NXTARL[3]-
text
Next Target location - this is needed to determine which port
to assign the output command to, and which location to send
the command.
DEPCOU
int
Number of other TROPERs and TROUCOs on which this is
dependent.
DEPEND[*]
ref
References of TROPERs and TROUCOs on which it is
dependent.
DEPTYP[*]
log
Type of dependencies - on success or failure.
PREOP
ref
Reference of previous operation which generated this output
command as one of its post operations. If no previous
operation this is NULL.
DATECR
date
Date command created by owning input command.
DATERD
date
Date command is ready to send after dependencies satisfied.
DATESN
date
Date command sent to destination location.
NRETRY
int
Number of attempts when command was sent.
MAXTRY
int
Number of attempts sending command before command fails.
WAITIM
int
Number of seconds delay between attempts at sending.
ENDTIM
date
Date when command will fail if sending remains stalled.
DATEAK
date
Date acknowledgement received from destination location
NACKN
int
Number of times acknowledgement received.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:7
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
DATERP
date
Date reply with results received from destination location.
DATERK
date
Date reply acknowledgement sent to destination location
NREPLY
int
Number of times reply received.
MSTEXT
text
Text info set on completion (normally only if failed to generate
operations).
TRPASS
log
True if command succeeded, false if failed. This is determined
from the result received.
POPCOD
int
Code for post operation creation function to be run. If none
then zero.
DATEND
date
Date all processing of command finished all post operations
generated, or command cancelled, or command timed out.
NREPAK
int
Number of times reply acknowledgement received.
USERST
text
User cancelling the command.
TRDBRF
ref
Reference for Database DB element.
TRFINO
int
File number of DB element.
TREXTN
int
Extract number of DB element.
TRAREA
int
Area number of DB element.
TRSTYP
int
Filetype of DB element.
TRDBNO
int
Dbnumber of DB element.
TRDACC
int
Access type of DB element
INARCO
int
Argument count for intargs (args of the command, defaulted to
zero).
INTARG[*]
int
Command arguments (passed around as a Conformant array)
TRCARG[*]
text
Command argument
‘NAME=X/Y’
TRVISI
log
Visible or not
DESC[256]
text
User description
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:8
qualifiers
space
separated.
E.g.
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
Values of OUTSTA State Attribute and Order of Change
5.7
WAIT
The command is waiting until it is independent of any other
operation/command. DATECR is set.
READY
The command is independent and ready to be sent.
DATERD is set.
STALLED
The command could not be sent. State will later return to
ACKNOWLEDGED ready for retry, or to TIMEDOUT.
SENT
The command has been sent
acknowledgement. DATESN is
incremented.
ACKNOWLEDGED
An acknowledgement has been received from the
destination location. DATEAK is set, NACKN is
incremented, CMREF is set.
REPLIED
A reply with results has been received from the destination
location. DATERP is set, NREPLY is incremented.
COMPLETE
A reply acknowledgement has been returned to the
executing location. DATERK, TRPASS, MSTEXT are set.
NREPAK is incremented.
STALLED_POSTOP
Post operations could not be created. State will later return
to COMPLETE ready for retry, or to TIMEDOUT.
PROCESSED
Any required post operations have been generated using
the result of this command. DATEND is set.
REDUNDANT
The command will not be executed now due to dependency
rules. DATEND is set.
CANCELLED
The command has been cancelled by owning TRINCO by a
user. DATEND is set.
TIMEDOUT
The command has had the number of sends exhausted, or
maximum time exceeded. DATEND is set.
and waits for
set, NRETRY
an
is
TROPER Element (Operation)
The TROPER element stores the information about an operation to be executed by the
daemon. The information includes the state of processing of the operation and is sufficient
for the operation to execute when a daemon is restarted.
Operations are generated by an input command when operations and output commands are
created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:9
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
Attributes
NAME
text
Not automatically generated.
TRONUM
int
Operation number of operation to execute. Note this is
not a command number.
OPSTAT
int
State of processing of the TROPER:
DEPCOU
int
Number of other TROPERs and TROUCOs on which
this is dependent.
DEPEND[*]
ref
References of TROPERs and TROUCOs on which it is
dependent.
DEPTYP[*]
log
Type of dependencies - on success or failure.
PREOP
ref
Reference of previous operation which generated this
output command as one of its post operations. In none
then NULL.
DATECR
date
Date operation created by owning input command.
DATERD
date
Date operation is ready to execute after dependencies
satisfied.
DATERN
date
Date operation was started running (executing).
NRETRY
int
Number of attempts to start operation running
MAXTRY
int
Maximum number of retries allowed before failure.
WAITIM
int
Number of seconds delay between attempts at
executing.
ENDTIM
date
Date when operation will fail if execution remains stalled.
DATESL
date
Date operation stalled during execution.
DATECM
date
Date execution completed.
MSTEXT
text
Text info set on completion.
TRPASS
log
True if operation succeeded, false if failed.
POPCOD
int
Code for post operation creation function to be run. If
none then zero.
DATEND
date
Date all processing of operation finished, all post
operations generated, or command cancelled, or
command timed out.
USERST
text
User cancelling
implemented.
TRVISI
log
Visible or not.
DESC[256]
text
User description.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:10
the
TROUCO
-
may
not
be
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
Values of OPSTAT State Attribute and Order of Change
5.8
WAIT
The operation is waiting until it is independent of any other
operation/command. DATECR is set.
READY
The operation is independent and ready to execute.
DATERD is set.
STALLED
The operation could not be executed. State will later return
to READY (ready for retry), or to TIMEDOUT. DATESL is
set.
RUNNING
The command has started running. DATERN is set,
NRETRY is incremented.
COMPLETE
A reply acknowledgement has been returned to the
executing location. DATECM, TRPASS, MSTEXT are set.
STALLED_POSTOP
Post operations could not be created. State will later return
to COMPLETE ready for retry, or to TIMEDOUT.
PROCESSED
Any required post operations have been generated using
the result of this command. DATEND is set.
REDUNDANT
The command will not be executed now due to dependency
rules. DATEND is set.
CANCELLED
The command has been cancelled by owning TRINCO by a
user. DATEND is set.
TIMEDOUT
The command has had the number of sends exhausted, or
maximum time exceeded. DATEND is set.
TRMLST, TRSLST, and TRFLST Elements
The TRMLST, TRSLST, and TRFLST elements are organisational elements (Message Lists,
Success Lists and Failure Lists respectively):
•
Messages (TRMESS) are grouped under Message Lists (TRMLST).
•
Successes (TRSUCC) are grouped under Success Lists (TRSLST) and TRMLST.
•
Failures (TRFAIL) are grouped under Failure Lists (TRFLST) and TRMLST.
Failures and Successes are propagated back to the originating location as messages as
soon as they are generated and before the full result is handed back. These are finally
stored under TRMLST as TRSUCC and TRFAIL elements.
All the list elements have no user attributes.
5.9
TRMESS, TRSUCC, and TRFAIL Elements
The TRMESS, TRSUCC, and TRFAIL elements are for Messages, Successes and Failures
respectively.
Operations and Output Commands are able to have any number of messages attached to
them. They will be generated by Local operation during their execution and be stored.
Remote operations will receive messages from their output commands that will:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:11
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
•
generate messages relating to transaction events (sends, acknowledgements etc.)
•
receive messages from the execution of commands at other site
•
receive transaction event messages forwarded through other site remote operations.
Operations and output commands have a TRSUCC attribute stating a success or (relative)
failure. Each point of failure will generate a single TRFAIL element (e.g. failure to claim an
element). Each point of success will generate a single TRSUCC element (E.g. an element
claimed).
The attributes of TRSUCC and TRFAIL elements are equivalent. They include:
•
A Reference to an element involved in the operation (e.g. the ref of a claimed element)
•
A double integer code relating to a PDMS message or error (0,0 if not known or
relevant)
•
A text string which is a representation of the said message or error.
•
An integer qualifier to be used for such things as session numbers etc.
The result of a command (TROUCO) is the sum of all TRSUCC and TRFAIL elements
owned by its operations and output commands. All of these are communicated back to
either the user (if it is a local command) or propagated to the originating site (if it is a foreign
command). In the latter case the compounded errors will appear under the relevant
originating TROUCO operation and hence onwards and upwards
Whether a TROPER itself is classed as a success is determined by its execute method.
Input Commands are successes if all its operations AND output commands are successes.
An output Command is a success if the input command it spawned returns a success.
Results are only passed on to the generating TROUCO when the input command is totally
finished.
Messages are sent immediately they are generated before waiting for operation or
command conclusion. They go the same route as the result, being compounded by a
TROUCO and transmitted to other site TROPER elements. They are only stored under the
final TRINCO generated from a USER command.
Attributes for Elements %TRSUCC and %TRFAIL
DATEMS
date
Date success/failure raised.
MESNUM[2]
int[2]
Message/error number relating to MSTEXT or 0,0 if none
available. This can be used as an indication of the severity
of a failure.
MSTEXT
text
Any result text (not passed on).
MSTYPE
int
Data type indicates significance of MESQUA, MSREF,
MSDTXT.
MESQUA
int
Data qualifier.
MESREF
ref
Data refno corresponding to the error.
MSDTXT
text
Data text of the result/error.
MSLOC
text
Name of location that generated the success/failure
TRCNUM
int
Source command type number (if generated by a
TRINCO).
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:12
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
TRONUM
int
Source operation type number (if generated by a
TROPER).
TRTYPE
text
Pseudo-attribute, which combines the OPTYPE (Operation
Number) and COMMTYPE (Command Number) attributes.
Allows you to query the member operations of a command
independently of whether the operations are TROUCO or
TROPER. It combines the TRCNUM and TRONUM
queries (these are attributes of TROUCO and TROPER
respectively).
Attributes for Element %TRMESS
DATEMS
Date
Date success/failure raised.
MESNUM[2]
int[2]
Message/error number relating to MSTEXT or 0,0 if none
available.
MSTEXT
Text
Message text.
MSLOC
text
Name of location that generated the success/failure.
MSSENT
log
Unused.
TRCNUM
int
Source command type number (if generated by a
TRINCO).
TRONUM
int
Source operation type number (if generated by a
TROPER).
TRTYPE
text
Pseudo-attribute, which combines the OPTYPE (Operation
Number) and COMMTYPE (Command Number) attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:13
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Transaction Database
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:14
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Summary
6
Command Summary
This chapter lists the ADMIN commands in functional groups. Details of the commands are
given in Command Details in alphabetical order of command name.
6.1
Project Definition
ACCESS
Changes the access rights of the specified user to PDMS
modules.
ACRADD
Adds a named ACR to the current ACR Group.
ACRREM
Removes a named ACR from the current ACR Group.
ADD
Places a named DB at a specified position in the current
MDB list.
AUTHENTICATION
Switches authentication user on/off.
AUTHUSERREM/OVE
Removes authenticated user.
CHANGE
Changes database access type, and the claim mode for
multiwrite databases. (In a Global project, also changes
primary location)
CDESC
Changes the description of the specified user, team,
database or MDB.
CNAME
Changes the name of the specified user, team, DB or MDB.
COPY
Copies a DB, MDB, Team, User, Module or Stamp.
CREATE
Creates a DB (including Extract DBs), MDB, Team, User,
Windows NT Authenticated user or Module.
CURRENT
Moves a DB to a specified position in the current MDB list.
DADD
Adds a Database or DB Set to the current DB Set.
DEFER
Makes a DB non-current.
DELETE
Removes the specified element from the project.
DREMOVE
Removes a DB or DB Set from the current DB Set
EXCHANGE
Replaces the current DB by a non-current DB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Summary
6.2
EXCLUDE
Removes a database which has been included from an
external project.
INCLUDE
Includes databases from another project in the current
MDB.
LIST AUTHUSERS
Lists authenticated users.
NEW
Creates a DB Set, Role, Scope, Access Control Right
(ACR) or ACR group. Also used to create a new TrueType
font element (TTFONT).
PASSWORDLOCK
Grant or prevent the ability for users to reset their own
password in Monitor.
PROJECT
Adds descriptive information to project definitions.
REPLICATE
Saves the structure or contents of a project in a named file.
REMOVE
Removes a DB from an MDB.
SET
Sets the current MDB, Team or DB Set.
TADD
Adds Users to the current Team.
TREMOVE
Removes Users from the current Team.
USERADD TO
Adds specified PDMS users to authenticated user.
DEFAULT. Sets the specified PDMS user as the default
PDMS username for the authenticated user.
USERREM/OVE FROM
Removes the specified PDMS user from the authenticated
user.
Q AUTHUSER
Queries the authenticated user.
Q AUTHENTICATION
Queries the authentication status.
Project Administration
BACKTRACK
Backtrack a database to a previous session.
EXPUNGE
Removes users from the Project and releases claimed
elements in databases.
EXTRACT
Control of database extracts
LOCK
Locks the Project Database so that Users cannot enter.
MAXUSERS
Maximum number of users for a project.
MERGE CHANGES
Merges the changes made to a database over several
sessions.
MESSAGE
Sends messages to other users.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Summary
6.3
BACKTRACK
Backtrack a database to a previous session.
MOVE
Moves a DB to a different area.
NEW STAMP
Creates a new stamp.
REVERT
Backtrack a database to a previous session.
UNLOCK
Unlocks a locked database.
Global Project Administration
ADMINISTER
Creates or opens a system database to allow you to
administer a remote location.
ALLOCATE
Allocates databases to a Location.
DEALLOCATE
Removes databases from a Location.
DUPLICATENAMES
Checks for elements with duplicate names in the Project.
GENERATE
Generates the files required for a new Location.
HUBLOCATION
Relocates Project Hub.
INITIALISE
Initialises communications link at a Location.
ISOLATION
Isolates a Location so that no updates take place.
MAKE GLOBAL
Makes a Standard Project into a Global Project.
NEW
Creates a DB Set, Role, Scope, Access Control Right
(ACR) or ACR group. Also used to create a new TrueType
font element (TTFONT).
PING
Checks that communications link to named location exists.
PREVOWNER
Restores the Hub to its previous Location. Restores a
database to its previous Primary Location.
PURGE
Removes old Database files and Picture files from an offline
Location.
RECOVER
Recovers data when a databases has been corrupted.
REMOTE
Allows the Hub or the Administering Location of a Satellite
to carry out certain tasks.
REMOTEMESSAGE
Sends messages to users at other Locations.
RENEW
Deletes a transaction database and creates a fresh version.
REORDER
Reorders a members list.
SET
Sets the current MDB, Team, or DB Set.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:3
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Summary
6.4
6.5
6.6
SORTALLOCATE
Sorts an allocation list so that Database extracts are in the
correct hierarchical order
SYNCHRONISE
Updates a database with changes from another Location.
SYSTEMLOCATION
Changes the Administering Location of a Satellite.
TRANSFER
Generates a directory containing copies of all database
files, ready for transfer to a Location.
UPDATE
Updates current Location and an immediate neighbour.
QREMOTE
Remote database query.
Module Definition
EDIT
Enables project module entries to be edited.
MODULE
Creates an entry for a module in the System DB.
Font Definition
FONTDIRECTORY
Sets the font directory name.
FONTFAMILY
Defines a font family.
TTFONT
Changes the definition of a TrueType font, that has
previously been created with the NEW TTFONT command.
Querying
LIST
Lists Project Information
QUERY
Queries information about ADMIN elements.
STATUSSESSION
Gives information about the current state of the Project.
SYSTAT
Gives information about users accessing the project.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:4
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Summary
6.7
6.8
General PDMS Commands
ALPHA
Sends command input and output to a file.
FINISH
Leaves PDMS, saving work.
GETWORK
Refresh view of System database.
SAVEWORK
Updates the Project Database.
TERM
Equivalent to ALPHA FILE END.
Data Integrity Checking
Within :
CHECK
Starts the integrity checking.
CHECKOPTION
Control what is to be checked, and the amount of
information output.
Stand-alone:
CHECK
Starts the integrity checking.
ERRORFILE
Specifies the name of the file containing the error and
warning messages when DICE is used in stand-alone
mode.
EXTERNAL
Checks that all external references point to DBs of
appropriate types.
MAXERRORS
Maximum number of errors found before data integrity
checking is abandoned.
MAXWARNINGS
Maximum number of warnings found before data integrity
checking is abandoned
MODE
Specifies what happens when DICE finds an error.
STATISTICS
Produces a summary of information about the database
being checked.
STOP
Exits from DICE in stand-alone mode. (Equivalent to
FINISH)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:5
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Summary
6.9
Reconfiguration
BRIEF
Brief output to pass 2 reconfiguration.
DUMP
Writes a reference number index to the given file.
ERRORS
Sets an upper limit on the number of errors that are
acceptable during Pass 2 of a reconfiguration.
FILE
Sets the output destination for reconfiguration messages
(see Chapter 3).
FROM
Specifies the source database for reconfiguration.
FULL
Gives full output from pass 2 reconfiguration.
LOAD
Loads the reference number index from the given file.
RCFCOPY
Defines the part of the database to be copied from the
source DB to the destination DB.
RCFUPDATE
Updates reference pointers into reconfigured database.
RCFUPGRADE
Consult AVEVA Solutions Support.
RECONFIGURE
Starts reconfiguration.
REINIT
Re-initialises the reference number index.
RESETXREFS
Consult AVEVA Solutions Support.
TO
Specifies the destination database for a reconfiguration.
UPGRADE
Produces macros to upgrade a project to a new version of
PDMS.
VB
Gives very brief output for pass 2 reconfiguration.
XREF
Consult AVEVA Solutions Support.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:6
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7
Command Details
The commands are described in this chapter in alphabetical order of command names. The
descriptions are usually under subheadings of Function, Description, Examples, Command
Syntax, and Related Commands. The syntax of commands is shown by syntax graphs.
These are discussed in the first two sections. The third section contains the command
descriptions.
7.1
Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs
The syntax graph conventions are as follows:
•
Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, where
the capital letters indicate the minimum abbreviation.
Note: This convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typed
in lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase
and lowercase letters.
•
For example, the command
CReate
•
can be input in any of the following forms:
CR
CRE
CREA
CREAT
CREATE
•
Commands shown in all uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.
•
Command arguments are shown in lowercase letters. These are just descriptions of
what you need to enter. For example:
FONTDirectory name
•
means that to set the name of the Font Directory to newfonts, you enter:
FONTD newfonts
•
Syntax graphs are read from top left to bottom right. The start point is shown by >, and
you can follow any path through the graph until the exit point, shown by >, is reached.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
•
Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any
one of the commands to the right of the junction. For example:
>----+--- ABC ------.
|
|
|--- PQR ------|
|
|
‘--------------+--->
•
means you can type in ABC or PQR or just press Enter to get the default option.
•
Text in angle brackets <. . . > is the name of another syntax graph. This convention is
used for syntax which occurs in many places. The graphs referred to are described at
the end of this section. For example:
>----+--- ABC ------.
|
|
|--- PQR ------|
|
|
|--- <dia> ----|
|
|
‘--------------+--->
•
means you can type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in
diagram <dia> or just press Enter to get the default option.
•
Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command options
following these may be repeated as required. For example:
.-----<-------.
/
|
>---*--- option1 ---|
|
|
|--- option2 ---|
|
|
‘--- option3 ---+--->
•
means that you can enter any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3,
where the options can be commands, other syntax diagrams, or command arguments.
•
The simplified format:
.----<------.
/
|
>---*--- name ----+--->
•
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.2
Notes on Syntax Graphs
<loc>
When a Location needs to be specified, it is shown as <loc> in the syntax graphs. It can be:
•
A three-letter Word. For example: CAM, the LOCID of a LOC element, where the
LOCID is 3 capital letters.
•
A text string of three alphanumeric characters, beginning with a letter. For example:
'CAM’, ‘A99' or ‘abc’, the LOCID of a LOC element.
•
A PDMS general identifier <gid> which points to a LOC element. For example: /
LOCATION_AAA.
<when>
>--+-- BEFORE --.
|
|
‘-- AFTER ---+------ <date> --------.
|
|
|------ SESS n --------|
|
|
‘-- STAMP stampname ---+--->
<date>
>--- time --- day --- month --- year
time is in the format hh:mm where hhx is the hour and mm the minutes. If not given then the
default of 23:59 is taken. There must not be any spaces around the colon.
day will be an integer. If not specified, the current day is taken. The day must be given if no
time was specified.
month can be entered as a word, or as a number separated by a slash. If not given the
current month is assumed. If used, the slash must be surrounded by spaces.
year will default to the current year. It may be entered as two or four figures.
Examples:
12:00 21 January 2002
9:30 11 / 1 / 02
10:30
21 / 1 / 2002
21 January
7.3
Detailed Descriptions of Commands
The detailed descriptions appear on the following pages in alphabetical order of command
name. Each description starts on a new page. The command name and relevant functional
group are at the top of the first page of the description, and the command name is repeated
on each continuation page.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:3
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
When a command is associated with the Global Project Administration functional group, the
command is specific to Global projects. Commands associated with other functional groups
may be used for Standard and Global projects, and any particular aspect of a command that
concerns Global projects is highlighted by the appearance of 'Global' in larger typeface.
7.3.1
ACCESS (Project definition)
Function:
Changes the access rights of the specified user to PDMS modules.
Example:
ACCESS ADMINUSER FREE DRAFTUSER GEN
Give user ADMINUSER FREE access, user DRAFTUSER GENERAL access.
Command Syntax:
.-------------<-------------.
/
|
>--- ACcess --*-- userid ---*--- FRee ------|
|
|
‘--- GEneral ---+--->
Related Commands:
CREATE
7.3.2
ACRADD (Project definition)
Function:
Adds an ACR to an ACR Group.
Description:
The ACR and the ACR Group must already exist, and the ACR Group must be the current
element.
You can then give a list of ACR names to be added to the Group. Note that ACR Groups
cannot contain other ACR Groups.
Examples:
ACRADD /ACR1 /ACR22 /ACR24
Adds the ACRs /ACR1, /ACR22 and /ACR24 to the current ACR Group.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:4
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.----<-------.
/
|
>-- ACRADD --*--- acrname ---'
|
‘--------------------->
7.3.3
ACRREM (Project definition)
Function:
Removes an ACR from an ACR Group.
Description:
The ACR Group must be the current element. You can then give a list of ACR names to be
removed from the Group.
Examples:
ACRREM /ACR1 /ACR22 /ACR24
Removes the ACRs /ACR1, /ACR22 and /ACR24 from the current ACR Group
Command Syntax:
.----<-------.
/
|
>-- ACRREM --*--- acrname ---'
|
‘--------------------->
7.3.4
ADD (Project definition)
Function:
Places a named DB at a specified position in the current MDB list.
Description:
The list position must be in the range 1 through 1000. If no list position is specified, the
specified DB is added as a deferred database (equivalent to DEFER).
Examples:
ADD STEELN/STEELN 1
Place DB STEELN STEELN at the head of the current MDB list
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:5
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.-------------<--------------.
/
|
>-- ADD ---*--- dbname ---+--- integer ---|
|
|
‘---------------+--->
Related Commands:
REMOVE, DEFER, CURRENT, EXCHANGEREMOVE, DEFER, CURRENT, EXCHANGE
7.3.5
ADMINISTER (Global Project Administration - Remote Administration)
Function:
Creates or opens a system database to allow you to administer a remote location.
Description:
Before you can use this command:
•
The Location must have been created using the NEW LOC command, and its Location
identifier must have been set. For example:
Locid 'AAA'
•
The system database of the new Location must be made Primary at the
administering Location using the SYSTEMLOCATION command. For example:
SYSTEMLOC /AAA PRIMARY AT /BBB
where /AAA is the identifier of the new Location, and /BBB is the identifier of the
Administering Location, that is, the location where the System database for the Location will
be Primary.
The NEWSYSTEM option is only available at the Hub. It creates a system database for a
new location in the transfer area. (This is similar to the GENERATE LOCATION command.)
The system database created is a copy of the Hub system database without MDBs and with
only a SYSTEM user. The Administrator at the Hub can then create Users and MDBs (as
well as Teams and Databases) for the Location before it is set up.
The SYSTEM option is available at the Administering Location, that is, the location where
the System database for the Location is Primary. This may be the Hub or another Satellite.
This command will close the local system database and open the appropriate satellite
system database. The database will be opened with Write access unless the READONLY
keyword is used.
After the SYSTEM or NEWSYSTEM commands have been given, you will be able to carry
out administration tasks for the remote location. To return to administering your own
(current) Location, give the command ADMINISTER LOCAL. To return to administering the
last system database which was open, give the command ADMINISTER SAME.
Any location may issue an ADMINISTER command for another other location’s system
database. If the system database is not Primary, then the system database will be opened
READONLY.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:6
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Once you have selected a remote system database, you can give most ADMIN commands,
which will operate on the remote Location. In particular, the following commands can be
used for housekeeping tasks on the remote System Database:
EXPUNGE SYSTEM
MERGE CHANGES SYSTEM
CHECK SYSTEM
RECONFIGURE SYSTEM
The Hub will not be allowed to REPLICATE the project when it is administering a remote
location, since the wrong system database will be replicated. However REPLICATE
SYSTEM commands (which generate macros to replicate the project structure) will still be
valid.
The administered location will still be able to lock or isolate the project locally. It will also be
able to administer its primary constructor databases by using the REMOTE <loc>
command, where <loc> is its own location identifier, followed by one of the normal
commands:
EXPUNGE
BACKTRACK
MERGE CHANGES
REVERT
CHECK
Reconfiguration will also be possible provided that suitable databases are primary at the
location.
Examples:
ADMINISTER NEWSYSTEM /Cambridge
ADMINISTER NEWSYSTEM 'CAM'
Allows the Hub Administrator to create data (Users, MDBs etc) for a Location
in the transfer directory.
ADMINISTER SYSTEM /Cambridge
ADMINISTER SYSTEM 'CAM'
Allows any System Administrator to read the System Database for
Cambridge. Only the Administrator at the Location where the Cambridge
System Database is Primary will have write access to it.
ADMINISTER SYSTEM SAME
Allows a System Administrator who is administering other Locations to open
the last System database opened.
ADMINISTER SYSTEM LOCAL
Allows a System Administrator who is administering other Locations to open
the local System database.
ADMINISTER SYSTEM AT /Cambridge
ADMINISTER SYSTEM LOCAL READONLY
This is equivalent to entering the ADMIN module as ADMIN READONLY.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:7
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>-- ADMINISTER --+--- NEWSYSTEM <loc> -----------------------------.
|
|
‘--- SYSTEM ------+-- AT <loc> ---.
|
|
|
|
|--- SAME -------|
|
|
|
|
‘--- LOCAL ------+--- READONLY --|
|
|
‘---------------+--->
Querying:
7.3.6
>--- Q CURLOC --->
Returns the true current location
>--- Q ADMLOC --->
Returns the currently administered location
ALLOCATE (Global Project Administration - Hub only)
Function:
Allocates databases and copies them to a Location.
Description:
Each Location has a list of databases that are allocated to it. The ALLOCATE command
adds a database to this list. A named database or all databases can be specified. The
allocation can be deferred until a given time. The databases must already exist at the Hub.
The Hub sends its own copy of the database, or that of the Location’s parent, to the
Location. This is not necessarily the most up-to-date copy. Note that the Database will also
be allocated to all ancestors of the Location, if it is not already allocated to them.
When a DRAFT Database is allocated, the picture files are not automatically copied with it.
They will arrive with the next update.
By default, the allocated databases will be Secondary, but you can specify that they will be
Primary. If a database already exists at a location, you can change its Primary/Secondary
status using the CHANGE command.
Several Databases can be allocated in the same operation using the ALLOCATE command.
In order for an extract database to be used at a satellite, all owning extracts must also have
been allocated there.
Offline Locations
The ALLOCATE PRIMARY option cannot be used. Use ALLOCATE followed by CHANGE
PRIMARY. The date option is not allowed.
Note that ALLOCATE should be followed by a TRANSFER command to copy the database
to the location. The CHANGE PRIMARY command should not be issued until this has been
done.
Using Macros to Allocate Databases
You will probably use a macro for long lists of databases allocations, for example, when a
project is first set up.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:8
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
The allocation process may take some time if there is a slow link between Hub and Satellite
and/or if databases sizes are large. Note that if a de-allocation is in progress, then the
allocation will stall until the de-allocation is complete before commencing.
Make sure that you do not try to allocate a database to the same location twice. If the
allocation appears to have failed, check the transaction databases at both the Hub and the
Satellite before attempting to repeat the command.
To check that the allocation has been successful, GETWORK and then navigate to the LOC
element. Navigate to its DBALL (allocation list) member, and query its members. Wait until
the DBALL element at both the Hub and the Satellite lists all the allocated databases before
continuing.
Note: If the transaction database for a location is being allocated, this command is not
recorded in the transaction database. It is not normally necessary to allocate it or
change its primary location explicitly.
Note: The OVERRIDE PROPG option cannot be used with a deferred time.
Examples:
ALLOCATE PIPE/PIPE PRIMARY AT CAM
Copies database PIPE/PIPE from the current Location to Location CAM,
making it Primary.
ALLOCATE ALL AT LON AT 23:30
Copies all databases which exist at the current Location but do not exist at
Location LON, from the current Location to Location LON, at 2330 hrs. The
Primary/Secondary status will not be changed.
ALLOCATE ALL AT OXF OVERRIDE PROPG
Copies all databases, including non-propagating databases, which exist at the
current Location but do not exist at Location OXF, from the current Location
to Location OXF. The Primary/Secondary status will not be changed.
Transaction databases will not actually be copied, but empty database files
will be created at secondary locations. This command is useful when
changing the Hub location, since it ensures that the DB allocation lists of the
old and new Hub locations match.
Command Syntax:
>-ALLOCate -+- teamid -.
|
|
|----------+- dbname -+-------------.
|
|
|
|
|- PRIMary ---|
|
|
|
|
‘- SECOndary -+-AT loc-+-AT <time>----.
|
|
|
|
‘--------------+->
|
‘- ALL ---------------------------AT loc-+-AT <time>-------.
|
|
‘-OVERride PROPG -+->
Related Commands:
DEALLOCATE, CHANGE dbname PRIMARY, HUBLOC, TRANSFER
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:9
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Querying:
7.3.7
--- Q DBALL --->
At a location, shows the list of allocated DBs
>--- Q DBLC --->
At a DB, shows the list of locations that have the DBs allocated
ALPHA (General PDMS Command)
Function:
Sends the information output in the Command Input and Output window to a file.
Examples:
ALPHA LOG /LOG OVERWRITE
Sends all information displayed in the Command Input and Output window to a
file named log.
ALPHA FILE /LOG
Sends reports to a file named log, for example, a DICE report.
ALPHA LOG END
Ends recording.
Command Syntax:
>-- ALPha ---*--- LOG ---+--- filename ---+--- OVERwrite -------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--- APPend ----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-----------------+-- COMMands ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- REQuests ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘---------------|
|
|
|
|
‘--- END ------------------------------------------|
|
|
‘--- FILE ---+--- filename ---+--- OVERwrite ------------------|
|
|
|
|
|--- APPend ---------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘--------------------------------|
|
|
‘--- END -----------------------------------------+-->
Related Commands:
TERM
7.3.8
AUTHENTICATION
Function:
Switches Windows NT authentication ON or OFF.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:10
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
AUTHENTICATION ON
AUTHENTICATION OFF
Command Syntax:
>- AUTHENTICATION -+- ON --->
|
‘- OFF --->
Related Commands:
LIST AUTHUSER, USERADD TO, USERREM/OVE FROM, AUTHUSERREMOVE,
CREATE AUTHUSER
7.3.9
AUTHUSERREM/OVE
Function:
Removes Window NT authenticated user.
Examples
AUTHUSERREM/OVE ‘fred.bloggs1’
Command Syntax:
>- AUTHUSERREMOVE --- authuser --->
Related Commands:
LIST AUTHUSER, USERADD TO, USERREM/OVE FROM, CREATE AUTHUSER,
AUTHENTICATION
7.3.10
BACKTRACK (Project Administration)
Function:
Allows you to backtrack a database to a previous session.
Description:
Sessions are defined as the work done between SAVEWORK commands. You can
backtrack to the date or session number required, or, if the required session has been
stamped, you can backtrack to the stamp. The current state of the database will be lost.
In a Global Project, this command can only be used when the databases are Primary at your
administering Location.
In a Global project, use the REMOTE <loc> BACKTRACK command to backtrack a
constructor database that is Primary at a remote Location, where <loc> is the Location
identifier. See the REMOTE command for examples.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:11
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
If you try to backtrack over any stamped sessions to a previous session, you will receive an
error message. Backtracking over stamped sessions is not allowed. You must remove the
stamp from the intervening sessions before you backtrack.
BACKTRACK removes the sessions permanently. The related command REVERT adds a
session containing the data for the specified old session.
The backtracked database is written to a new file. This is done to avoid the situation where
secondary database files in a Global project could still contain removed sessions. This
situation would cause propagation failures if further sessions were added to the backtracked
file.
Note: For extracts, the REVERT command is used instead of BACKTRACK.
Examples:
BACKTRACK HANGERS/PADD TO SESSION 4
Backtracks the HANGERS/PADD database to Session 4. The team id (HANGERS)
and TO can be omitted.
BACKTRACK HANGERS/PADD TO STAMP /stamp_007
Backtracks the HANGERS/PADD database to the session that has the stamp
stamp_007. The team id (HANGERS) and TO can be omitted.
BACKTRACK /HVAC 10:30 31 / 8 / 96
BACKTRACK /HVAC 10:30 31 AUGUST 1999
Backtracks the HVAC database to 10.30 am on the 31 August 1999. If the time is
omitted, 11.59 p.m. is assumed. If the month is not given, the current month is
assumed. If the year is not given, the current year is assumed. This example
assumes that the team name has been specified using the SET
command.BACKTRACK (continued)
BACKTRACK PIPE/PIPE-A AT OXF TO SESSION 4
In a Global project, backtracks the PIPE/PIPE-A database at Location OXF to
Session 4. The team id (PIPE) and TO can be omitted. (The database PIPE/PIPEA must be Primary at the Location OXF,) and the System Database for OXF must
be Primary at the current Location. See the ADMINISTER SYSTEM command.
Command Syntax:
>- BACKTrack -+- teamid -.
|
|
‘----------+- dbname TO <when> --->
Querying:
Q SESSION
Related Commands:
REVERT, MERGE CHANGES, REMOTE BACKTRACK, REMOTE REVERT - Global only
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:12
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.11
BRIEF (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Gives brief output from pass 2 reconfiguration. This is the default.
Examples:
A short example of brief output is shown below. Compare with very brief output from the VB
command.
*** Pass one initiated ***
*** Pass one completed ***
*** Pass two initiated ***
EC
LIBY
#92/842
=16/2404
(24,90)
Warning! library number 242 already exists in the
project.
Duplicate libraries should not be used in the same MDB
EC
DEPT
#16/805 =16/2408
Phase one complete - starting phase two
#EAE SHEE
#88/842 =16/2417 /DR1/S5
IDLN: The head of the current element does not contain
the attribute given
#EAE SHEE
#69/808 =18/2408 /DR1/S4
IDLN: The head of the current element does not contain
the attribute given
#EAE SHEE
#53/819 =22/2402 /DR1/S3
IDLN: The head of the current element does not contain
the attribute given
***Reconfiguration Completed
0 Elements were not defined in DDL
0 Elements have been lost
0 Elements are no longer named
3 Attributes were incorrectly defined
0 Elements were not inserted.
Command Syntax:
>--- Brief --->
Related Commands:
FULL, VB, ERRORS
7.3.12
CANCELCOMMAND (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Allows a daemon command being executed at the current location to be cancelled.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:13
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
The command to be cancelled must be in the ACKNOWLEDGED, READY, RECEIVED or
STALLED state. See TRINCO Element (Input Command) for information about the different
states. A READY command cannot be cancelled if it has running operations.
Examples:
CANCELCommand TRINCO1 OF /2002/APR/23/USERA/LON
Command Syntax:
>--- CANCELCommand <gid> --->
where <gid> is a TRINCO in the transaction database for the Location.
Related Commands:
REMOTE CANCEL
7.3.13
CDESC (Project definition)
Function:
Changes the description of the specified User, Team, Database or MDB.
Description:
The CDESC command is used to set a description for elements created without one, or to
overwrite an existing description.
Note: This command can only be used with Users, Teams, Databases and MDBs. For all
Admin elements, the description can be set or changed by navigating to the element
and setting the Description attribute directly.
Examples:
CDESC
CDESC
CDESC
CDESC
USER TEST/TEST ’This is a test user’
TEAM TEST ’This is the test team’
DB TEST/DESI ’The test design database’
MDB TEST ’This is the test MDB’
Command Syntax:
>--- CDesc ---+--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
USer username/password ’text’ ---.
|
TEam name ’text’ ----------------|
|
MDB name ’text’ -----------------|
|
DB dbname ’text’ ----------------+-->
Related Commands:
CNAME, CHANGE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:14
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.14
CHANGE (Project definition)
Function:
•
Changes database access type (UPDATE or MULTIWRITE), and the claim mode for
multiwrite databases.
•
It also changes the file number and control mode, and brings foreign DBs up to date.
•
Optionally set PROTECTION to limit copying and extraction of data between users and
projects. It is possible to set or reset a password associated with the database.
In a Global Project, this command can only be given at the Hub. It can also be used to
change the Primary Location of a database.
Description:
By default, databases are created with UPDATE access type, which means that they can be
opened with one writer and n readers.
DESIGN, DRAFT (PADD), CATALOGUE and ISODRAFT databases can be multiwrite
databases, which allows more than one user to write to the same database. Multiwrite
databases can have their claim mode set to IMPLICIT, in which case any element which is
modified will be claimed automatically. Alternatively, the claim mode can be set to EXPLICIT,
in which case users must claim elements before they can modify them, using the CLAIM
command in the constructor modules. For more information, see the Reference Manual for
the module.
The CHANGE command can be used to change the access mode from UPDATE to
MULTIWRITE, and from MULTIWRITE, to UPDATE. It can also be used to change the claim
mode of Multiwrite databases from IMPLICIT to EXPLICIT, and from EXPLICIT to IMPLICIT.
Note: You cannot set the controlled attribute, which means that access is controlled by an
external system, using this command.
If the database has an extract database created from it, the access mode must stay
as Multiwrite.
If the access mode of a database used as a foreign database is changed, you should
use the CHANGE FOREIGN command in the project which has included the foreign
database to update the project.
Both UPDATE and MULTIWRITE databases can also have their CONTROLLED attribute
set.
Setting the PROTECTION parameter will disallow copying extraction of data between
projects or users which are not members of the protected database. An optional expiry date
may be specified. If a password is already associated with the database then that password
must be specified in the same command using the VERIFY <password> clause, otherwise
an error will occur and no change will be made.
CHANGE dbname PROTection [ ON | OFF ] [EXPires future-date ]
Setting the PASSWORD parameter sets or resets the password associated with the
database. If encrypted appware or command scripts have the same password embedded
then they are able to access attribute values that would otherwise be unavailable in a
protected database. If a password is already associated with the database then the existing
password must be specified in the same command using the VERIFY <password> clause
otherwise an error will occur and no change will be made.
CHANGE dbname VERIFY old-password PASSWORD new-password
In a Global Project, the CHANGE command can be used at the Hub to change the primary
location of a database. The CHANGE PRIMARY command cannot complete while there are
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:15
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
users in PDMS with write access to the database. The command will eventually complete
once all such users have left PDMS. You may need to use EXPUNGE to remove phantom
users.
After the CHANGE PRIMARY command has been issued, users in PDMS with write access
to the database can continue to modify the database, even if GETWORK is used. Once they
have made a module switch, the database will become read-only.
If a CHANGE PRIMARY command fails, the previous primary location will normally be
recovered automatically. If the recovery fails (for example, the daemon is not running), you
can recover the previous Primary location using the command:
PREVOWN dbname
Use of the PREVOWN command should be avoided if possible.
Offline Locations
Before issuing a CHANGE PRIMARY command to or from an offline location, all users
should have left PDMS at the old primary location. The TRANSFER command should first
be used to bring the database at the new primary location up-to-date. Any modifications to
the database at the old primary location subsequent to this TRANSFER will be lost. Only
after this TRANSFER is it safe to issue the CHANGE PRIMARY command.
Examples:
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI ACCESS MULTIWRITE
Change access rights to named database to multiwrite.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI CLAIM IMPLICIT
Change claim mode for named DB to IMPLICIT. This option can only be used for a
MULTIWRITE database.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI ACCESS UPDATE
Change access rights to named DB to single write.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI CLAIM OFF
Change claim mode for named DB to OFF. This option can only be used for a
CONTROLLED database.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI CONTROL OFF
Change control setting for named DB to OFF. This option can only be used for a
CONTROLLED database.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI FINO 500
Change the Filenumber (FINO attribute) of the given database to the given number.
By default, the Filenumber will be set to 0, and the filename of the database file will
be derived from the database number. Using the default is recommended,
particularly if you are using extracts. If you set the filenumber explicitly, the extract
filename will still be derived from the Database number (NUMDB attribute), and so
the consistency of filenames within an Extract family will be lost.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:16
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI FINO 0
Change the Filenumber (FINO attribute) of the given database to 0. This command
can be used to update database files to the new file numbering convention, which
will keep Extract filenames consistent within an Extract family.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI VERIFY 'XXXXXX' PASSWORD
'SecretPassw0rd'
Changes the password associated with the given database from 'XXXXXX' to
'SecretPassw0rd'. If the given database does not have a password associated with
it, the VERIFY part can be omitted.
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI PROTECTION OFF
Changes the protection status of the given database so that it is no longer
restricted under IPR protection. In this case no password has been associated with
the database.
CHANGE FOREIGN PIPE/PIPECATA RESET
If PIPE/PIPECATA is a local database in project AAA, and a foreign database in
project BBB, and the access is changed (in AAA), you should give this command in
project BBB to update the project.
Note: On the following Change...Primary Commands
The new Primary Location will receive all outstanding updates of the database from
the current Primary Location.
Note: Offline Locations:
The Primary Location of a Database cannot be changed directly between an off-line
satellite and an on-line satellite. The Primary Location of the database must first be
changed to the Hub. The <date> option is not allowed for off-line Locations.
The following command can only be used at the Hub of a Global project:
CHANGE TEST/TESTDESI PRIMARY AT CAM
Change the primary location of the named DB to be CAM. The database will
automatically become secondary at the current Primary location.
The following option is only available at the Hub of a Global Project:
CHANGE HVAC/HVAC PRIMARY AT CAM AT 2330
Change the Primary Location of the named DB to the Location CAM at the
specified time.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:17
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.-------<---------.
/
|
>- CHange -+- dbname -+--- VERify text ---’
|
|
|
|- ACCess -----+--- MULTIWrite ----------------.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--- CONTRolled ----------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--- UPDAte --------------------|
|
|
|
|
|- CLAIM ------+--- IMPLicit ------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--- EXPLicit ------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--- OFF -----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|- FINO -------+--- n -------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--- 0 -------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|- PROTected --+--- ON -+----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-EXPires future date -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--- 0FF------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|- PASSword ---+--- text ----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--- DELete --------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘- CONTROL ----+--- ON ------------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘--- OFF -----------------------|
|
|
‘- FOREIGN dbname RESET ----------------------------------+->
Note: The CLAIM OFF option is only applicable to Controlled databases.
The CLAIM IMPLICIT and CLAIM EXPLICIT options are only applicable to Multiwrite
and Controlled databases.
The following option is only available at the Hub of a Global Project:
>--- CHange dbname --- PRIMary AT
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:18
<loc> ---+-- AT <date> --.
|
|
‘---------------+--->
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Querying:
>--- Query DB dbname --->
>--- Q PRMLOC --->
At a DB, shows the primary location.
Related Commands:
PREVOWNER, TRANSFER (Global only)
7.3.15
CHECK (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Starts the integrity checking of the databases specified.
Description:
•
Using the CHECK command from within a PDMS project, you can check:
•
The System, Miscellaneous and Comms databases
•
One or more named databases
•
All the databases in a project
For information about using DICE (the PDMS Data Integrity Checker) as a stand-alone
program, see Stand-Alone DICE.
Stand Alone DICE
In a Global Project, both Primary and Secondary databases can be DICE checked. This
enables you to check a number of locations to find, for example, a valid version of a
database which has been corrupted at its primary location. To check a database at a remote
location, prefix the CHECK command with REMOTE <loc> command, where <loc> is the
Location identifier. See the REMOTE command for examples.
Note: Remote checking uses stand-alone DICE.
When a DICE report indicates that buckets have been lost, normally this would require the
master database to be patched. However in a global project, this error is non-fatal if there
are working extracts. These databases are non-propagating and only exist at the primary
location of their extract owner. This results in the error report, since the buckets for working
extracts are not accessible at the primary location of the master db.
Examples:
CHECK DBS MASTER/DESI MASTER/CATA
Checks the integrity of a single named DB or a series of DBs within the project. Up
to ten DBs may be specified in each command.
CHECK SYSTEMDB
Checks the integrity of the project’s System DB. In a Global Project, the current
administered System DB is checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:19
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
CHECK COMMDB
Checks the integrity of the project’s Comms DB.
CHECK MISCDB
Checks the integrity of the project’s Misc DB.
CHECK GLOBALDB
Checks the integrity of the project’s Global DB.
CHECK PROJECT
Checks the integrity of all DBs in a project, including the System DB, Comms DB
and Misc DB (but not the virgin DBs). The DBs are checked automatically by DICE
in the following order:
The System DB
The Comms DB
The Misc DB
The user-accessible DBs, which are checked team by team
CHECK FILES /TRA000/TRA003 /TRA000/TRA001
Checks the integrity of one or more DBs by specifying the names of the files in
which the DBs are held. Up to ten files may be specified in each command. This
version of the command is usually used in stand-alone mode.
(A list of DBs in a project, together with the names of the corresponding files in
which they are stored, can be produced by using the LIST FILES command.)
Note: If DICE is being used within PDMS and the CHECK FILES option is used, then no
external reference checking can be done for that file and EXTERNAL NOCHECK will
be assumed.
Command Syntax:
From a PDMS module:
>- CHEck -+|
||
||
||
||
‘-
.------<----.
/
|
DBs --*-- dbname ---+----------------------------------.
|
SYStemdb ----------------------------------------------|
|
GLOBaldb ----------------------------------------------|
|
COMMdb ------------------------------------------------|
|
MISCdb ------------------------------------------------|
|
PROject -----------------------------------------------+->
Note: All the CHECK syntax except CHECK GLOBALDB can be applied to a remote
Location in a Global Project by prefixing the command by REMOTE <loc>, where
<loc> is the Location identifier. See the REMOTE command for examples.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:20
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
In stand-alone mode:
.-------<------.
/
|
>--- CHEck --- FIles --*--- filename ---+--->
Related Commands:
CHECKOPTION
7.3.16
CHECKOPTION (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Sets the options for database integrity checking.
Description:
The CHECKOPTION command is used to control the level of detail output by a CHECK
command. You can specify whether or not you want to check references to other (external)
databases. You can also check consistency of claimlists, and, if there are errors, instruct
PDMS to correct them where possible.
Use the CHECKOPTION command to set up the output you require, and then use the
CHECK command to perform the check.
Note: This command is only available within a PDMS project. The corresponding top-level
commands MODE, STATISTICS, MAXERRORS and MAXWARNINGS are available
when running stand-alone DICE or REMOTE CHECK.
Controlling the Amount of Information Output
There are two types of DB fault detected by DICE:
•
An error is identified if the DB is corrupted internally.
•
A warning is identified if DICE encounters, for example, a fault with a reference to an
external DB.
In BRIEF mode, checking is stopped when the first error is encountered; that is, DICE
simply determines whether or not the DB is corrupt. This is the default mode.
In FULL mode, DICE continues checking the whole DB or file, listing all errors and warnings,
until a prescribed maximum error or warning count is exceeded, when checking of that DB is
abandoned. Occasionally DICE will stop before processing the whole DB. This will happen
when the error is so severe that it is not worth continuing; for example, if a database has
been truncated.
The default setting for the maximum error count and maximum warning count is 50, but you
can specify different numbers by using the MAXERRORS and MAXWARNINGS options.
STATISTICS ON causes DICE to produce a statistical summary of the DB, including its size,
the number of elements contained within it, etc.
STATISTICS OFF specifies that no statistics are to be gathered during the checking. This is
the default setting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:21
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
An example of the output from DICE when statistics are requested is as follows:
OVERALL STATISTICS
==================
Total no. of entries in Name Table = 111
Total no. of elements checked = 782
Total no. of ref attributes found = 726
Total no. of external references = 0
Checking External References
The elements in some types of DB have reference or reference array attributes which can
point to elements in other DBs. If you use the EXTERNAL option, DICE will check that all
external references point to DBs of appropriate types. For example, a reference attribute in
a Design DB which points to a Draft (PADD) DB must be illegal, but a reference attribute
pointing to a Catalogue DB will be accepted.
This command cannot be used in stand-alone mode because only one DB file can be
accessed at a time.
EXTERNAL NOCHECK is the default. In this mode DICE does not cross-check any
references to other DBs.
If EXTERNAL CHECK is specified, the following tests are applied to each external DB to
which reference is made:
•
Does the referenced DB exist?
•
Is the referenced DB of a valid type?
•
Is the position pointed to within the limits of the referenced DB? Note that in the case of
a DB which has copies, DICE only checks that the position pointed to is within the limits
of the largest copy.
A non-fatal error message is produced for each invalid external reference found.
If you specify the EXTERNAL CHECK option, you can specify a preference MDB. In this
case, DICE will check external references to databases which are current within the given
MDB, before checking other databases in the project. This option is mainly relevant when
extracts are used, which means that there may be many databases with the same database
number in the project, and so it is less relevant to Global projects.
Once set, the preference MDB remains current until another EXTERNAL CHECK
PREFERENCE command is entered to set a new MDB, or to specify that none is to be
used, (though the setting will become irrelevant if EXTERNAL NOCHECK or EXTERNAL
REJECT is entered). Using just EXTERNAL CHECK to switch external setting back on will
not affect the current preference MDB.
The EXTERNAL REJECT option should normally be chosen only when you are certain that
the DB which is being checked should not contain any external references. If this setting is
used, any external reference found in the DB will be reported as a fatal error and further
checking will be abandoned.
Note that when the CHECK FILES option is used, no external reference checking can be
done for that file and EXTERNAL NOCHECK will be assumed.
The CLAIM options are only relevant to extracts.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:22
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Extract Claimlists
The CLAIM ON option (the default) will check that the claim list in an extract corresponds
with the claim list in its master database. The following error messages may be produced:
700:
Element ref/ref is not in parent extract claim list
702:
Element ref/ref is claimed to another user/extract
703:
Element ref/ref needs claiming to child extract in parent extract
704:
Element ref/ref needs clearing in parent extract claim list
If PATCH ON has been selected, then an attempt is made to patch errors of type 701, 703
and 704, and these cases will be treated as warnings rather than errors (and will therefore
not terminate the check even if MODE FULL has not been selected).
For cases 701 and 703, the patch attempts to claim the element from the parent extract (and
continues up the extract hierarchy if necessary). If successful, the following message will be
written:
701:
PATCH: Element ref/ref claimed in parent extract
For case 704, the patch attempts to release the element from the parent extract. If
successful, the following message will be written:
CHECKOPTION (continued)
704:
PATCH: Element ref/ref cleared from parent extract claim list
If the attempted patch is unsuccessful, the following error will be raised:
537:
Attempt to patch failed
There is no patch for errors of type 702.
(Patches may also be attempted for some other extract problems.)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:23
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>-- CHECKOption ----+|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
|
||
|
|
|
|
||
||
||
|
|
‘-
EXTernal --+- CHECK -+-----------------------.
|
|
|
|
‘- PREFerence -+- NONE -|
|
|
|
|
‘- mdb --|
|
|
|-- NOCHeck ----------------------|
|
|
‘-- REject -----------------------|
|
MOde -------+-- FUll ------------------------|
|
|
‘-- BRief -----------------------|
|
STATistics -+-- FULL ------------------------|
|
|
|-- ON --------------------------|
|
|
‘-- OFF -------------------------|
|
MAXErrors n ---------------------------------|
|
MAXWarnings n -------------------------------|
|
CLAIM ------+-- ON --------------------------|
|
|
‘-- OFF -------------------------|
|
PATCh ------+-- ON --------------------------|
|
|
‘-- OFF -------------------------+->
Related Commands:
CHECK
7.3.17
CNAME (Project definition)
Function:
Changes the name of the Element.
Description:
This command is the only way in which the System Administrator can change a user’s
password without deleting and recreating the user. Note that users can change their own
passwords using the PASSWORD command in MONITOR. Passwords are alpha numeric
character strings up to 15 characters long. The following characters should be avoided:|’@$/*.
The CNAME DB command must be used with great care. If both quoted DBs already exist,
and if the OVER option is used, ADMIN will copy the second DB into the first DB, and will
then delete the second DB. If, in the same circumstances, the OVER option is not used,
ADMIN will generate an error message.
In a Global Project, you can only change the Name of a Team or a Database at the Hub.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:24
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
CNAME USER JF RAB/ROB
Change username JF to username RAB, password ROB
CN DB TEAMNAME/GBPADD TEAMNAME/GBDRAFT
Change DB GBPADD to GBDRAFT if GBDRAFT does not exist.
CN DB TEAMNAME/GBPADD TEAMNAME/GBDRAFT OVER
Change DB GBPADD to GBDRAFT even if GBDRAFT exists.
In a Global project, if /GBDRAFT already exists, then it must not be allocated to
locations other than the Hub, since the CNAME will delete this database.
CN MDB /DES1 /DESIGN
Change MDB name /DES1 to MDB name /DESIGN
CN TE GEORGEB GEORGEC
Change team name GEORGEB to GEORGEC.
Command Syntax:
>-- CName --+-- USer --- username username ---+--- /password---.
|
|
|
|
‘----------------|
|
|
|--- DB --- dbname dbname ---+--- OVER ------------|
|
|
|
|
‘---------------------|
|
|
|--- MDB --- mdbname mdbname ----------------------|
|
|
‘--- TEam -- teamname teamname --------------------+->
Related Commands:
CHANGE, EXCLUDE, INCLUDE, MOVE, CDESC
7.3.18
COP (Project definition)
Function:
Creates a copy of a DB, MDB, Team, User, Module or Stamp.
Description:
Any number of copies may be made. Copies of databases have the same database number
as the original. An MDB cannot contain more than one database with the same database
number.
To avoid the risk of database corruption, databases must always be copied using this
command in ADMIN and not by using operating system utilities or commands.
Note that extract databases and databases which own extracts cannot be copied. This also
applies when copying from foreign projects.
In a Global Project, you can only copy Teams and Databases at the Hub.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:25
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
If the PROTection parameter was set during the creation of a database then a copy
command will not be permitted.
Examples:
COPY DB ADMIN/CA1A TO ADMIN/CA1C TO AREA 051
Copies DB ADMIN/CA1A to area 051, renaming it ADMIN/CA1C
COPY TEAM TESTTEAM TO SUPPORT
Team SUPPORT will be the same as team TESTTEAM when queried.
COPY TEAM TESTTEAM TO SUPPORT EXCL USERS
Team SUPPORT will be the same as team TESTTEAM when queried, but the team’s
users will not be copied.
CO MDB /ADMIN TO /ADMINCOPY
MDB/ADMINCOPY will contain the same structure as /ADMIN.
CO USER ADMINA TO TESTA/GEN
A new user TESTA, password GEN will be created, belonging to the same teams,
and having the same access rights as, user ADMINA
COPY DB Z/Z FROM PROJ ABC US SYSTEM/XXXXXX TO A/A
DB Z/Z will be copied from project ABC, so that it can be accessed by user SYSTEM,
password XXXXXX, into the current project. It will be given the name A/A.
COPY DB Z/Z TO A/A TO AREA 99 TO FINO 50
DB Z/Z will be copied to A/A, in area number 99 with filenumber 50. The environment
variable pointing to area 50 will need to be set.
COPY STAMP /stamp_005 TO /stamp_012
The stamp stamp_012 will be a copy of the stamp stamp_005. The list of databases
referenced will be identical.
COPY DB Z/Z FROM PROJ ABC123 USER FRED.BLOGGS1/B TO A/A
Copies from a project with a long project identifier, accessed via user ‘Fred Bloggs’
password B into the current project.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:26
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>- COpy -+- DB dbname -+- FROM PROject projid USer id pass -.
|
|
‘------------------------------------+-> continued
continued --- TO dbname -+-- TO AREA n --.
|
|
‘---------------+-- TO FINO filenumber --.
|
|
‘------------------------+->
>- COpy -+|
|
|
||
||
|
|
|
|
||
‘-
TEam teamid TO teamid -+- EXCLuding USERs -------------------------.
|
|
‘-------------------------------------------|
|
MDB mdbname TO mdbname --------------------------------------------|
|
USer word TO word name -+--- FRee ---------------------------------|
|
|
|--- GEneral-------------------------------|
|
|
‘------------------------------------------|
|
STAMP stampname1 TO stampname2 ------------------------------------|
|
MODule -+- integer ---.
|
|
|
|
‘- moduleid --+- TO integer moduleid ----------------------+->
Related Commands:
CREATE, INCLUDE
7.3.19
CREATE (Project definition)
Function:
Creates USERs, Windows NT authenticated users, TEAMs, Databases (including Extracts)
and MDBs.
Description:
Update databases can be accessed by one writer and many readers. All PDMS databases
can be update.
Multiwrite databases can be accessed by many writers and many readers. DESIGN,
CATALOGUE, DRAFT and ISODRAFT databases can be multiwrite.
Multiwrite databases can have their claim mode set to IMPLICIT, in which case any element
that is modified will be claimed automatically. Alternatively, the claim mode can be set to
EXPLICIT, in which case users must claim elements before they can modify them, using the
CLAIM command in the constructor module.
In addition, both types of Database can be controlled, which means that access will be
controlled by an external system.
You can create Extract databases from standard (Master) multiwrite databases. Extract
databases can be standard extracts or working extracts, and in addition, both standard and
working extracts can be variant extracts. Examples of creating the different types of
extracts, and the full syntax, are given here. For general information about using extracts in
projects, see the Administrator User Guide; for information about using extracts in Global
projects, refer to Running Global Projects.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:27
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Before a newly created extract can be used at a satellite, all its owning extracts must have
been allocated there. If the immediate parent extract is secondary at the satellite and there
are no scheduled updates, it should have been synchronised since the new extract was
created.
Note: When the daemon is used to create an extract in a Global project, the CREATE
EXTRACT command includes a recovery operation to restore the primary location of
the database in the event of failure of the command, prior to its Allocate operation.
Therefore, the PREVOWNER command is not usually needed after a failure of
CREATE EXTRACT. However, the CREATE Allocate operation does not have an
automatic recovery operation and, in the unlikely event of this failing, PREVOWNER
may be needed.
In a Global Project, you can only create Teams and Master Databases at the Hub. Extracts
can be created at any authorised location. Working Extracts can only be created at locations
where the owning extract database is Primary.
Offline Locations:
Working extracts cannot be created at an offline location that is administered by the Hub.
The offline location must be locally administered.
Authorised locations:
A location is authorised to create extracts (for itself or an administered location) if its
NOEXTC attribute is false. The Project hub is always authorised to create extracts.
Examples:
Creating Teams, Users and MDBs
CR TEAM PIPING
Create Team PIPING
CREATE USER RAB/ROB
Create User RAB with password ROB, default access rights
CRE US HHJ/MICK FREE
Create User HHJ with password MICK, free access rights
CR MDB /STEEL
Create MDB /STEEL
CR USER ‘FRED.BLOGGS1’/ABC
Creates user ‘Fred.Bloggs1’ (Non alphabetic user names are valid)
CR AUTHUSER NAME
Creates a NT authenticated user which should be the name of a valid windows
user.
Creating Master Databases
Note: If the SET TEAM command has not been used to set the current teamid, then the
dbname must be prefixed by the name of the team which owns it.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:28
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
CREATE DB PIPING/PIPEDB DESI
Create Design database PIPING/PIPEDB
CREATE DB STEEL/STEELDB DESI ACC MULTIW CLAIM EXPL
Create multiwrite Design DB STEEL/STEELDB, with explicit claim mode.
CREATE DB STEEL/STEELDB DESI ACCESS MULTIWRITE DBNO 901
Create multi-write Design DB STEEL/STEELDB, database number (NUMBDB
attribute) 901.
CREATE DB STEEL/STEELDB DESI DBNO UNIQUE
Create Design DB STEEL/STEELDB using the next available number within the
project database range.
CREATE DB TEST/TESTDESI FINO 500
Create the database TEST/TESTDESI with the given Filenumber (FINO attribute).
By default, the Filenumber will be set to 0, and the filename of the database file will
be derived from the database number.
Using the default is recommended, particularly if you are using extracts. If you set
the filenumber explicitly, the extract filename will still be derived from the Database
number (NUMDB attribute), and so the consistency of filenames within an Extract
family will be lost.
CREATE DB TEST/TESTDESI FINO 0
Create the database TEST/TESTDESI with the Filenumber (FINO attribute) of the
given database set to 0. This command can be used to update database files to the
new convention, which will keep Extract filenames consistent within an Extract
family.
CREATE DB PIPE/PIPEEB DESI IN AREA 501
Create Design DB PIPE/PIPEEB in area 501
Setting the PROTECTION parameter will disallow copying extraction of data between
projects or users which are not members of the protected database. An optional expiry
date may be specified. Setting the PASSWORD parameter sets or resets the password
associated with the database. If encrypted appware or command scripts have the same
password embedded then they are able to access attribute values that would otherwise
be unavailable in a protected database.
CREATE dbname PROTection [ ON | OFF ] [EXPires future-date ]
[ PASSWORD password ]
Creating Standard Extracts
CREATE EXTRACT PIPING/PIPE-X1 FROM PIPE/PIPEDB
Create an extract PIPING/PIPE-X1 from database PIPING/PIPEDB
CREATE EXTRACT ADMIN/PIPE-X1 FROM PIPE/PIPEDB
Create an extract ADMIN/PIPE-X1 from database PIPING/PIPEDB. Note the
extract can be owned by a different Team from its owner.
CREATE EXTRACT PIPING/PIPE-X1 FROM PIPE/PIPEDB EXTNO 100
Create an extract PIPING/PIPE-X1 with extract number 100 from database
PIPING/PIPEDB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:29
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Creating a Master Database above an existing Master Database
CREATE MASTER PIPING/PIPE-X1 ABOVE PIPE/PIPEDB
Create a new master database PIPING/PIPE-X1 above existing master database
PIPING/PIPEDB. This means that PIPE/PIPEDB is now a child extract of the new
master PIPING/PIPE-X1
Creating Working Extracts
Working extracts can only be created from a database that is primary at the current
location.
CREATE WORKING EXTRACT FROM DB PIPING/PIPEDB FOR USERA
Create a working extract from PIPING/PIPEDB for USERA
CR WORK EXTR FROM DB PIPING/PIPEDB FOR USERB EXTNO 21
Create a working extract from PIPING/PIPEDB for USERB with extract number 21.
Creating Variant Extracts
CREATE VARIANT TEST/PIPE-V1 FROM PIPING/PIPEDB
Create Design database PIPING/PIPEDB
Creating Extracts for a Satellite
CREATE EXTRACT PIPING/PIPE-X1 FROM PIPE/PIPEDB AT LON
Create an extract PIPING/PIPE-X1 from database PIPING/PIPEDB at satellite with
LOCID ‘LON’
Creating Transaction Databases (Global projects only)
CREATE DB TRANSACTION/LON
Create transaction db for location with LOCID ‘LON’.
database type. Transaction databases have a special
associates them automatically with the location. This
created with the correct primary location. These are
databases.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:30
Note the omission of the
naming convention which
database is automatically
created as OVERWRITE
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
Databases
>- CReate DB
teamid/dbname -+|
||
||
||
||
‘-
CATA -.
|
DESI -|
|
ISOD -|
|
PROP -|
|
PADD -|
|
DICT -+- IN AREA n -.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
cont
cont >---+- PASSword text -.
|
|
‘-----------------+--> cont
cont >-- ACCess -+- UPDATE -----.
|
|
+- CONTRolled -.
|
|
‘- MULTIWrite -+- CLAIM -+- EXPLicit -|
|
|
‘- IMPLicit -+--------+-> cont
cont >
- PROTected -+--- ON -+----------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘-EXPires future date -|
|
|
‘--- 0FF------------------------+--------+-> cont
cont >---+-- EXTNO n -.
|
|
‘------------+- DBNO n -.
|
|
‘----------+-- FINO n --.
|
|
‘------------+-- DESC text --.
|
|
‘---------------+--->
userid and teamid
are alpha numeric character strings up to 50 characters long.
The following characters should be avoided:-|’@$/*.
passwd is an alphabetic character string up to fifteen characters
long.
name
is a normal PDMS name consisting of a slash (/) followed by up to
31 alphanumeric characters.
dbname
is a 32-character name.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:31
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Extracts
>- CReate MASTER team/db ABOVE team/db ---->
cont
>- CReate ---+--- EXTRact ---.
|
|
‘--- VARiant ---+--- team/db FROM team/db ---->
cont
>- CReate EXTRact team/db FROM team/db -+-------------------.
|
|
‘- AS AT SESSION n -+--> cont
>- CReate VARiant team/db FROM team/db -------------------->
cont
>- CReate WORKing EXTRact FROM team/db FOR user
cont
---------->
cont >---+- IN AREA n -.
|
|
‘-------------+- CONTROL -.
|
|
‘-----------+- CLAIM -+- IMPLicit -.
|
|
|
|
‘- EXPLicit -|
|
|
‘----------------------+--> cont
Standard projects:
cont >--------+- EXTNO n -.
|
|
‘-----------+- DESC text -.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
Global projects:
cont >-+- EXTNO n -.
|
|
‘-----------+- AT <loc>-.
|
|
‘-----------+- REFBLOCKS n -.
|
|
‘----------------+- DESC text -.
|
|
‘-------------+->
The REFBLOCKS option is used to allocate a block of reference numbers. By default, one
REFBLOCK will be assigned to the extract. More reference blocks may be required if many
users are creating elements. Refer to ‘Using Extracts with Global Projects' in Running
Global Projects for further information.
The AT <loc> option allows the Hub or an administering location to create an extract
database whose primary location is at the specified satellite.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:32
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Transaction Databases (Global projects only)
>- CReate DB TRANSACTION/name ------------cont >
cont >--+-- EXTNO n -.
|
|
‘------------+- DBNO n -.
|
|
‘----------+-- FINO n --.
|
|
‘-------------+-- DESC text --.
|
|
‘---------------+--->
The ‘name’ must be the LOCID of a valid Location.
Users, Teams and MDBs
>- CReate -+- USer userid passwd -+--- FRee ------.
|
|
|
|
‘--- GEneral ---|
|
|
|- TEam teamid ------------------------+-- DESC text ---.
|
|
|
|
‘----------------|
|
|
‘- MDB name --------------------------------------------+->
Authenticated User
>- CR/EATE --- AUTHUSER --- authuser --->
Querying:
>--- Query --+-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
‘--
USer userid ---.
|
DB dbname -----|
|
MDB name ------|
|
Authuser ------|
|
TEam teamid ---+-->
Related Commands:
SET, MODULE, CHANGE, NEW, LIST AUTHUSER, USERADD TO, USERREM/OVE
FROM, AUTHUSERREMOVE, AUTHENTICATION
7.3.20
CURRENT (Project definition)
Function:
Moves a DB to a given position in the current MDB list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:33
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
The specified list position must be in the range 1-1000.
Examples:
CURRENT MASTER/AREA-D 2
Move DB MASTER/AREA-D to be at position 2 in the current MDB list
Command Syntax:
.------------<----------.
/
|
>-- CUrrent ---+--- dbname ---*--- integer -- dbname ---’
|
|
‘--- integer --+-- integer -------------------->
Related Commands:
ADD, REMOVE, DEFER, EXCHANGE
7.3.21
DADD (Project definition)
Function:
Adds a DB or another DB Set to a DB Set.
Description:
The DB Set must first be specified using the SET DBSET command.
You can then give the keyword DB, followed by a list of DB names to be added to the Set,
and the keyword DBSET, followed by a list of DB Set names to be added to the Set. The
names have to be elements of the type specified by the last keyword, but you can use both
keywords more than once in the same command line.
Examples:
The following example assumes that both the Team and the DB Set have been set using the
SET command.
DADD DB /STEELN /STEELS DBSET /ASET DB /PIPEN
Adds the databases /STEELN, /STEELS and /PIPEN, and all the Databases in the
DB Set /ASET, to the current DB Set.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:34
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.----------------<------------.--<---.
|
|
/
.----<-------.
|
|
/
/
|
|
|
>-- DADD --*--- DB -------*--- dbname ---+---'
|
|
|
|
.-------------------<------------.
|
| /
|
|
| /
.-------<-------.
|
|
|/
/
|
|
|
*--- DBSET ----*--- dbsetname ---+---+---+--->
/
Querying:
Q SET DBSET
Related Commands:
DREMOVE, DELETE, SET, NEW
7.3.22
DEALLOCATE (Global Project Administration - Hub only)
Function:
Removes databases from the list of databases allocated to a Location.
Description:
A named database or all databases can be specified. The databases must be Secondary at
the Location.
If you try to de-allocate a database from a Location which has a Descendant Location, and
the database is also allocated to the Descendant, you will be warned of the existence of the
Descendent allocation, and no action will be taken. You must use the INCLUDING
DESCENDANTS option to de-allocate the database from all Descendant Locations as well.
When a de-allocation command is in progress, the location is locked against Allocate
commands. This lock is set when the Deallocate command is issued, and released by the
daemon once the database(s) have been deleted at the location. The Allocate command
can still be executed, but will stall until the full de-allocation is complete. Locking only
applies to the locations where dBs are being deallocated, and other locations should not be
affected.
The transaction database for the location is not de-allocated when de-allocating all
databases.
Occasionally it is necessary to perform routine housekeeping and other maintenance on
satellite databases and then it is advantageous to be able to deallocate them temporarily.
To do this we can use the KEEPMDBS option. When the database is reallocated, it
becomes available once more after the MDB is reselected.
Note: When a user at a satellite accesses an MDB which contains a de-allocated database
it will be treated as a deferred database. This may lead to unexpected errors since
attributes in other databases may still contain references to this database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:35
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
See the guide Running Global Projects for more information about de-allocating databases
that have extracts.
Examples:
DEALLOCATE PIPE/PIPE AT CAM
Removes the database PIPE/PIPE from Location CAM. The database must not
exist at any Locations which are descendants of CAM.
DEALLOCATE HVAC/HVAC AT OXF INCLUDING DESCENDANTS
Removes the database HVAC/HVAC from Location OXF and all descendants of
OXF.
DEALLOCATE ALL AT LON
Removes all databases which exist at Location LON. Note that you cannot use the
INCLUDING DESCENDANTS option with ALL.
DEALLOCATE PIPE/PIPE KEEPMDBS AT CAM
Temporarily deallocates and makes unavailable for use database PIPE/PIPE,
which exists at Location CAM.
Command Syntax:
>- DEALLOC/ATE --- ALL ---+--- KEEPMDB/S --.
|
|
‘----------------+--- AT --- loc --->
>- DEALLOC/ATE - teamid - dbname -+- KEEPMDB/S -.
|
|
‘------------+-AT-loc-+-INC/LUDING-DESCEND/ANTS->
|
‘------
The KEEPMDBS option means that the database will not be removed from MDBs at the
satellite although its database file will be deleted and the database removed from the
location's allocation list. This option is useful when a database is being de-allocated
temporarily for housekeeping procedures. A replacement database with the same details
will be available for use immediately it is re-allocated without any need to modify MDBs.
SORTAL/LOCATE --- loc --->
This command sorts extract databases in a location's list of allocated databases into masterchild-grandchild order, so that extract owners precede extract children. Note that this
command will have no effect until the relevant databases have been allocated.
Related Commands:
ALLOCATE, CHANGE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:36
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Querying:
7.3.23
At a location:
>--- Q DBALL
At a Database:
>--- Q DBLC --->
DEFER (Project definition)
Function:
Makes a specified DB non-current.
Description:
Moves a DB from the current list of an MDB into the deferred list of an MDB. You can specify
the position in the list by giving an integer.
Examples:
DEFER MASTER/AREA-D
Make DB MASTER/AREA-D non-current.
Command Syntax:
.------<------.
/
|
>-- DEfer ---+--- dbname ---*--- dbname ---’
|
|
‘--- integer --+----------------->
Related Commands:
ADD, REMOVE, CURRENT, EXCHANGE
7.3.24
DELETE (Project definition)
Function:
Deletes elements from the project.
Notes on Deleted Files
When a database is deleted, its file is renamed by addition of the suffix .deleted. The
renamed file is actually deleted on the next SAVEWORK or module switch, once the change
has been saved in the system or global database.
This arrangement allows database files to be recovered after a crash, by the PDMS exit
handler. However, if the exit handler cannot be invoked (for example, due to a loss of power)
then the files with the .deleted suffix can be restored manually, to make the project directory
consistent with the system or global database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:37
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
The DELETE command can be used to delete Admin elements.
The DELETE command cannot be abbreviated. This helps protect against accidental
deletion. To avoid the risk of database corruption, all deletion of DBs (i.e. the files inside the
Project Directory) must be done from the ADMIN module and not by using operating system
utilities or commands.
Notes on Global Projects:
You can only delete Teams, Databases, Locations and Groups at the Hub.
Offline locations:
When a location is deleted, the system administrator must ensure that the system database
for that location is deleted from all other locations.
See Running Global Projects with PDMS for further information about deleting databases
and extracts from a Global project.
Examples:
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
DELETE
USER
TEAM
MDB
DB
Deletes the current element of the appropriate type.
DELETE DB PIPEN/DESI
Deletes Database PIPEN/DESI
DELETE USER HVAC
Deletes User HVAC
DELETE TEAM PIPEN
Deletes Team PIPEN
DELETE MACRO 7
Deletes inter-db connection macro 7 in current project
DELETE MESSAGE 3
Deletes message 3 in current project
DELETE RUNFILE
Deletes runfile entry for current module.
DELETE STAMP
Deletes the stamp that is the current element.
Global Projects only:
DELETE LOCATION
Deletes the current Location. This will remove the system database file for that
location from all other locations. The location may be deleted provided all
databases (other than its transaction database) have been deleted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:38
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
DELETE LOCATION LON
Deletes Location LON.
DELETE GRP
Deletes the current Location Group.
DELETE LCOMD
Deletes the current communication event.
DELETE WORKING EXTRACT FROM CTATEST/DES1 FOR USERA
Deletes the working extract for USERA from the database CTATEST/DES1.
Working extracts cannot be deleted unless the owning extract is primary at the
currently administered location.
Command Syntax:
>--- DELETE ---+--- USer ------+--- user--------------------------.
|
|
|
|
‘----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- TEam ------+--- team_name --------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- DB --------+--- db_name ----------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘----------------------------------|
|
|
|-- WORKing -+- EXTract --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘- VARiant --+- FROM dbname FOR user -|
|
|
|--- MDB -------+--- mdb_name ---------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- LOCation --+--- code -------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|--- location_name ----------------|
|
|
|
|
‘----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- GRP ------------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- LCOMD ----------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MESSage n ------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MACro n --------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- RUNFile --------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- STAMP ----------------------------------------|
|
|
|
.--------<-------.
|
|
/
|
|
‘--- MOdule ----*--- integer ------|
|
|
|
|
‘--- module_name --+---------------+-->
Note: Locations, GRPs and LCOMDs exist in Global Projects only.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:39
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.25
DREMOVE (Project definition)
Function:
Removes a DB or DB Set from the current DB Set.
Description:
The DB Set must first be specified using the SET DBSET command.
You can then give the keyword DB, followed by a list of DB names to be removed from the
Set, and the keyword DBSET, followed by a list of DB Set names to be removed from the
Set. The names have to be elements of the type specified by the last keyword, but you can
use both keywords more than once in the same command line.
Note that DB Sets are deleted using the DELETE command.
Examples:
The following example assumes that both the Team and the DB Set have been set using the
SET command.
DREM DB /STEELN /STEELS DBSET /ASET DB /PIPEN
Removes the databases /STEELN, /STEELS and /PIPEN, and all the Databases in
the DB Set /ASET, from the current DB Set.
Command Syntax:
.----------------<------------+--<---.
|
|
/
.----<-------.
|
|
/
/
|
|
|
>-- DREMove --*--- DB -------*--- dbname ---+---'
|
|
|
|
.-------------------<------------.
|
| /
|
|
| /
.-------<-------.
|
|
|/
/
|
|
|
*--- DBSET ----*--- dbsetname ---+---+---+--->
/
Querying:
Q SET DBSET
Related Commands:
DADD, DELETE, SET
7.3.26
DUMP (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Writes a reference number index to the given file.
Description:
If required, the reference index should be written for each database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:40
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
DUMP /DUMP1
Write reference number index to named file.
Command Syntax:
>--- DUmp filename --->
Related Commands:
LOAD, XREF
7.3.27
DUPLICATENAMES (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Checks for elements with duplicate names in the Project.
Description:
You can specify all Databases in the Project or a list.
The process takes place in several stages, using different variations of the command. A
typical sequence is shown in the Examples.
Example of Command Sequence:
DUPLIC START
Initialise memory allocation etc.
DUPLIC FILE /filename
Specify file for report. If this command is not given, the report will be sent to the
screen.
DUPLIC INCLUDE ALL
Include all the Databases in the project in the check.
DUPLIC EXCLUDE DB dbname dbname ...
Exclude the named Databases from the check.
DUPLIC CHECK
Perform duplicate name check on the Databases specified in the INCLUDE
and EXCLUDE options, and exit. The list of Databases to be checked will be
emptied.
If you want to do another check, you must give the DUPLIC START command again, redefine the list of Databases you wish to check, and give the DUPLIC CHECK command
again.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:41
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Other Examples:
Other options which you can use to set up the list of Databases are as follows:
DUPLIC INCLUDE DB dbname dbname ...
Include the named Databases in the check.
DUPLIC INCLUDE CLEAR
Remove all entries in INCLUDE list
DUPLIC INCLUDE LIST
List all entries in INCLUDE list
DUPLIC EXCLUDE CLEAR
Remove all entries in EXCLUDE list
DUPLIC EXCLUDE LIST
List all entries in EXCLUDE list
The output reports the element name and the DB reference number and DB
number for each of the duplicates, for example:
/00NEB0SED =15196/3964, 7004, =15192/24230, 7000
/00NEB0SFD =15196/3965, 7004, =15192/24231, 7000
/00NEB0SFE =15196/3966, 7004, =15192/24232, 7000
If both MASTER and COPY DBs occur in the list then the DB refs and nos will be identical.
If necessary, use the LIST DBS command to associate a DB name with a DB number.
Command Syntax:
>--- DUPLICatenames START --->
>--- DUPLICatenames FIle filename --->
>--- DUPLICatenames INclude ---+--- ALL ---------------------.
|
|
|
.----<-------.
|
|
/
|
|
|--- DB ---*--- dbname ---+---|
|
|
|--- LIST --------------------|
|
|
‘--- CLEAR -------------------+--->
.----<-----------.
/
|
>--- DUPLICatenames EXclude ---+--- DB ---*--- dbname -------+
|
|
|--- LIST --------------------|
|
|
‘--- CLEAR -------------------+--->
>--- DUPLICatenames CHECK --->
7.3.28
EDIT (Module definition)
Function:
Enables project module entries to be edited.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:42
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
Enters edit mode (which continues as long as only command lines beginning with EDIT or
MODULE are used) within which a project module entry’s NAME, NUMBER, SECURITY,
MODE, data file, RESUME file and IMACRO and BUFFER options can be edited.
Examples:
EDIT MODU ADMIN IMACRO /START
Enter EDIT mode and edits module ADMIN to add the macro /START as an
initialisation macro.
EDIT MODU 77 SECU FR
Enter EDIT mode and edits module 77 to make it a FREE module
MODU 77 MODE CATA RW
In Edit mode, change module 77 to CATA db with read/write mode.
EDIT MODU DESIGN RES /%PDMSEXE%/DES
Change resume file name for DESIGN module entry
EDIT MODU ADMIN IMACRO DELETE
Edits the ADMIN module definition and deletes the Imacro entry.
Command Syntax:
.-----------------------------------------------------------------------.
/
|
>- EDit -*- MODule -+- number --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘- modname -+- NUmber number ---------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|- NAme name -------------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|- Security -+-FRee ---------------------.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-GENeral-------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- Mode file -+-RW-----------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-Read---------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-None---------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-DEFault------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- Open -+- SYMBOLFILE --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- ATTlibfile --|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘- MESSagefile -+-name-.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘------+-DELETE-|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- Resume file ---------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- Buffer -+-integer---------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-DEFault---------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- Imacro -+- name----.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘- DELETE -+-----------------+-newline-’
|
|
‘----------------------+-------------------------------------------------->
Related Commands:
MODULE, LIST MODULES, DELETE MODULES
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:43
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.29
ERRORFILE (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Specifies the name of the file containing the error and warning messages when DICE is
used in stand-alone mode.
Description:
PDMS obtains the text of all its user messages from an external file. When DICE is used
from within a PDMS project, this file is available automatically, but this is not the case in
stand-alone mode. Hence the first command you must give in stand-alone mode is the
ERRORFILE command, followed by the name of the error message file.
The name of the message file can be found from the entry for DICE in the current version of
makemac.mac, the project configuration macro.
Examples:
ERRORFILE /%PDMSEXE%/MESSAGE.DAT
Command Syntax:
>--- ERRORfile filename --->
Related Commands:
MODULE, LIST MODULES
7.3.30
ERRORS (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Sets an upper limit on the number of errors that are acceptable during Pass 2 of a
reconfiguration.
Description:
If the specified limit is reached, reconfiguration is abandoned and the DB is left unaltered.
By default, an unlimited number of errors can occur.
Command Syntax:
>--- ERRors number --->
Related Commands:
BRIEF, FULL, VB
7.3.31
EXCHANGE (Project definition)
Function:
Replaces the current DB by a non-current DB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:44
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
The DB names to be exchanged do not need to be listed in a particular order, since the MDB
knows which are current and which are non-current, but they must be paired correctly if
more than two names are listed.
Examples:
EXCHANGE PIPING/AREA-A SERV/AREA-D SERV/AREA-E PIPING/AREA-B
PIPING/AREA-A and PIPING/AREA-B are the current DBs. They will be replaced by
the DBs SERV/AREA-D and SERV/AREA-E respectively, even though they are
listed out of sequence.
Command Syntax:
.--------<----------.
/
|
>-- EXchange ---*--- dbname dbname ---’
|
|-----------------------.
|
|
‘--- integer integer ---+--->
Related Commands:
ADD, REMOVE, CURRENT, DEFER
7.3.32
EXCLUDE (Project definition)
Function:
Removes a database which has been included from an external project.
In a Global Project, you can only exclude Databases at the Hub. The database must not be
allocated to any satellites.
Examples:
EXCLUDE DB MASTER/STEELCATA
Remove named DB from current project.
Command Syntax:
>--- EXCLude DB dbname --->
Related Commands:
INCLUDE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:45
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.33
EXPUNGE (Project Administration)
Function:
Removes users who are accessing the Project, and releases claimed elements in Multiwrite
databases.
Description:
This command can be used to remove phantom users after abnormal exits. Users who are
actually accessing the Project will be removed as soon as they change module.
Note: EXPUNGING users re moves them from the COMMS database but does not end
their PDMS session or remove the file-locks on the database. To remove these locks
you can use the Microsoft NETFILE API or proprietary tools like pstools from
Sysinternals.
In a Global project, you can use this command on Constructor databases at Locations which
you administering remotely by prefixing it with the REMOTE <loc> command, where <loc>
is the Location identifier. See the REMOTE command for examples.
In a Global project, you can use the EXPUNGE DB SYSTEM command to expunge the
current administered System database. You will have to give the ADMINISTER SYSTEM
command first if you are administering a Location remotely.
Alternatively you can set the LCPOVW attribute to TRUE, which allows the daemon to
overwrite locked files provided there are no database READERS (as recorded in the
Session data in the COMMS database).
Note: Do not use this facility if the project has users from other projects. Such users are
valid database READERS but are not recorded in the Session data for the current
project.
Examples:
EXPUNGE
Expunge all users. (This should be used with care.)
EXPUNGE ’29f’
Expunge user identified by given process number.
EXPUNGE USER ’USERA’
Expunge user given by name.
EXPUNGE USER nnnn
Expunges the specified user slot number.
EXPUNGE DB dbname USER usernumber
Expunges given user from given DB. This is allowed even if there are users accessing
the DB. It is the preferred way of freeing unreleased claims.
EXPUNGE DB dbname
Releases elements which have been claimed in a multiwrite database. These
elements may be inaccessible after a user has exited abnormally. This is not allowed if
there are current users accessing the DB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:46
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
EXPUNGE DB SYSTEM
Releases elements which have been claimed in a SYSTEM database. These
elements may be inaccessible after a user has exited abnormally.
EXPUNGE DAEMON
Expunge the Global daemon user (Global projects only). Note the EXPUNGE
DAEMON command does not stop the Global daemon process. The Global daemon
user is not expunged by default - however certain commands (such as MERGE
CHANGES on a Transaction db) will fail if there is still a session for the Daemon user.
Command Syntax:
.-----<--------------------------------.
/
|
>-- EXPUNGE --*-- process_id --------------------------|
|
|
|-- user ---------+-- username ----------|
|
|
|
|
‘-- slot nnnn ---------|
|
|
|-- DB dbname ----+-- USER usernumber ---|
|
|
|
|
‘----------------------'
|
|-- DB SYSTEM ----.
|
|
|-- DB GLOBAL/DB -|
|
|
|-- DAEMON -------|
|
|
‘-----------------+----------------->
Note: All the EXPUNGE syntax can be applied to a remote Location in a Global Project by
prefixing the command by REMOTE <loc>, where <loc> is the Location identifier.
See the REMOTE command for examples.
Querying:
Q ACTIVE
Related Commands:
SYSTAT,
For Global projects - REMOTE, REMOTE EXPUNGE
7.3.34
EXTERNAL (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Checks that all external references point to DBs of appropriate types.
Description:
The elements in some types of DB have reference or reference array attributes which can
point to elements in other DBs. If you use the EXTERNAL command, DICE will check that
all external references point to DBs of appropriate types. For example, a reference attribute
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:47
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
in a Design DB which points to a Draft (PADD) DB must be illegal, but a reference attribute
pointing to a Catalogue DB will be accepted.
This command cannot be used in stand-alone mode because only one DB file can be
accessed at a time.
EXTERNAL NOCHECK is the default. In this mode DICE does not cross-check any
references to other DBs. This setting is used by standalone DICE (and REMOTE CHECK).
If EXTERNAL CHECK is specified, the following tests are applied to each external DB to
which reference is made:
•
Does the referenced DB exist?
•
Is the referenced DB of a valid type?
•
Is the position pointed to within the limits of the referenced DB? Note that in the case of
a DB which has copies, DICE only checks that the position pointed to is within the limits
of the largest copy.
A non-fatal error message is produced for each invalid external reference found.
The EXTERNAL REJECT option should normally be chosen only when you are certain that
the DB which is being checked should not contain any external references. If this setting is
used, any external reference found in the DB will be reported as a fatal error and further
checking will be abandoned.
If the DICE option CHECK FILES is used, no external reference checking can be done for
that file and EXTERNAL NOCHECK will be assumed.
Examples:
EXTERNAL CHECK
EXTERNAL NOCHECK
EXTERNAL REJECT
An example of the output when EXTERNAL CHECK is specified:
External databases referenced
_____________________________
Number
______
Name
____
8
31
No of references
________________
GLB/DESI
TECHP/TPDESI
41
4
Command Syntax:
>--- EXTernal ---+--- NOCHeck* ---.
|
|
|--- CHECK ------+-- PREFERENCE
|
|
‘--- REject -----+--->
The default is NOCHECK.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:48
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.35
EXTRACT (Project Administration)
Function:
Control of database extracts
Description:
This command allows you to release, issue, drop and refresh extract databases.
FLUSH
Writes the changes back to the parent extract. The Extract claim is
maintained. The extract is refreshed with changes that have been
made to its owning database.
FLUSH RESET
A flush reset command will completely clear the flush stack for the
extract.
In most cases the system will resolve any dependencies between
issued flush commands, including any resets required after failed
flush commands. Only as a last resort should the user consider
issuing a Flush Reset command.
FLUSHW
(Flush without refresh) Writes the changes back to the parent extract.
The Extract claim is maintained. The extract is not refreshed.
Ordinary Flush should be used in preference.
REFRESH
Refreshes any extract in the database hierarchy with changes that
have been made to its parent extract.
FULLREFRESH
Refreshes an extract and all its parent extracts - its ancestors. A full
refresh takes place from the top of the database hierarchy
downwards, ending with a refresh of the extract itself. Each extract is
refreshed with changes that have been made to its parent extract.
ISSUE
Writes the changes back to the parent extract, and releases the
extract claim.
RELEASE
Releases the extract claim: this command can only be used to
release changes that have already been flushed.
DROP
Drops changes that have not been flushed or issued. The user claim
must have been unclaimed before this command can be given.
Note: That unlike the constructor modules, you can only perform these operations on a
complete database in ADMIN, and so extract claiming has no meaning in ADMIN.
For general information about using extracts in projects, see the Administrator User
Guide. For information about using extracts in Global projects, see Running Global
Projects.
In a Global project, Flush, release and issue may be executed remotely if the parent extract
is not primary at the current location. In this case, FlushW is used and the database must be
explicitly refreshed after completion of the flush.
Offline locations:
Extracts cannot be used which are primary at an offline location unless the entire extract
hierarchy is primary at the offline location. This is because claim, flush and release
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:49
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
commands can only be issued locally. There is no mechanism at an offline location to claim
(etc.) from an online location.
Examples:
EXTRACT FULLREFRESH DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Refreshes all parent extracts in the database hierarchy above PIPE/PIPE-X1,
ending by refreshing PIPE/PIPE-X1 itself with changes to its parent extract.
EXTRACT REFRESH DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Refreshes database PIPE/PIPE-X1 with changes to its parent extract.
EXTRACT RELEASE DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Releases all extract claims in database PIPE/PIPE-X1.
EXTRACT ISSUE DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Issues all changes to database PIPE/PIPE-X1 and releases the extract claim.
EXTRACT FLUSH DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Writes the changes to database PIPE/PIPE-X1 back to its parent extract, but keeps
the elements claimed to the extract. Also, PIPE/PIPE-X1 is refreshed with changes
to its owning database.
EXTRACT FLUSHW DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Writes the changes to database PIPE/PIPE-X1 back to its parent extract, but keeps
the elements claimed to the extract. PIPE/PIPE-X1 is not refreshed.
EXTRACT DROP DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Drops all changes to database PIPE/PIPE-X1.
EXTRACT FLUSH RESET DB PIPE/PIPE-X1
Undo any failed or incomplete flushes on this database.
Command Syntax:
>-- EXTRACT -+|
|
||
||
||
||
||
‘-
FLUSH --+------------.
|
|
‘--- RESET --|
FLUSHWithoutrefresh -|
|
RELEASE -------------|
|
ISSUE ---------------|
|
DROP ----------------|
|
FULLREFRESH ---------|
|
REFRESH -------------+- DB - dbname -->
Note: In ADMIN, you cannot carry out partial operations as you can in the constructor
modules. The commands can only be applied to entire DBs.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:50
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.36
FINISH (General PDMS Command)
Function:
The FINISH command saves work and leaves PDMS.
Examples:
FINISH
Command Syntax:
>--- FINISH --->
Related Commands:
SAVEWORK
7.3.37
FONTDIRECTORY (Font definition)
Function:
Sets the font directory name.
Description:
The font directory stores the AVEVA font families for use in DESIGN and DRAFT. Font
families are defined by the FONTFAMILY command. The FONTDIRECTORY command can
be given in ADMIN or used in the make macro. In the make.mac macro supplied the font
directory is defined as %PDMSEXE%. If the font directory is unset, PDMS will search for the
fonts in the user’s current directory.
Examples:
FONTD /%PDMSEXE%
Command Syntax:
>--- FONTDirectory name --->
Querying:
>--- Q FONTDirectory --->
Related Commands:
FONTFAMILY, Q FONTS
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:51
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.38
FONTFAMILY (Font definition)
Function:
Defines a AVEVA font family.
Description:
Defines a font family in terms of a character set and a style, or in terms of a file. If a file is
specified, a bold version of the same font family can also be specified. Sloping text can be
produced.
The directory where the font files are to be found must be specified using the
FONTDIRECTORY command.
The macro makemac.mac supplied with PDMS includes the following commands:
FONTF 1 UK STYLE 1
FONTF 2 UK STYLE 2
FONTF 3 UK STYLE 3
FONTF 4 UK STYLE 4
FONTD /%PDMSEXE%
For each font family, you can define an angle of slope between -85 and +85 degrees
inclusive. The text can be sloped forwards (positive angles) and backwards (negative
angles).
Note: True-Type fonts are not defined in this way, these use the TTFONT element.
Examples:
FONTFAMILY font_no IR ir_no STYLE style_no ANGLE angle
FONTFAMILY font_no FILE /abc BOLD /def ANGLE angle
PROJECT MBCHARSET JAPAN ANGLE angle
FONTFAMILY 1 IR 4 STYLE 1
FONTF 2 UK ITALIC
FONTF 3 UK BLOCK
FONTF 4 GREEK STYLE 1
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:52
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.-------------------------<------------------------------.
/
|
>-- FONTFamily ---*--- n ---*- IR number --.
|
|
|
|
|- UK ---------|
|
|
|
|
|- US ---------|
|
|
|
|
|- GREEk ------|
|
|
|
|
|- CYRIllic ---|
|
|
|
|
|- LATIn 1 ----|
|
|
|
|
|- LATIn 2 ----+-- STYle n ---------.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- LIne ------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- BLock -----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- SErif -----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- ITalic ----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- SCript ----------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- TYpewriter ------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-- UWLIne ----------|
|
|
|
|
‘- FILE filename -- BOLD filename --+- ANGLE n --|
|
|
‘------------+-->
Note: The IR number is the International Registration Number of the font. See ISO 8859.
The font family number must be in the range 1-4
The style n must be in the range 1-7.
The angle n must be in the range -85 to + 85 degrees. Negative angles slope the text
backwards.
Related Commands:
FONTDIRECTORY, Q FONTS, NEW TTFONT, TTFONT
Querying:
>--- Q FONTFamily integer --->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:53
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.39
FROM (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Specifies the source database for reconfiguration.
Examples:
FROM DB MASTER/DESIGN
Source data is in database MASTER/DESIGN in current project
FROM DBFILE /des016
Source data is in specified file (assumes project directory is current directory)
FROM PROJECT des MASTER/DESIGN
Source data is in specified DB within project des
FROM FORMATTEDFILES /F1 /F2
Source data is in named character-format intermediate files (used when
transferring data between computers).
FROM SYSTEM
This command is used to reconfigure the System database. It is followed by the
command RECONFIGURE. For more information, see Section 3. In a Global
Project, this command is only available at the primary location of the System DB
(the administering location).
FROM GLOBAL
This command is only available in a Global Project, at the Hub. The command is
used to reconfigure the Global database. It is followed by the command
RECONFIGURE. For more information, see Section 3.
Command Syntax:
>--- From ---+--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
DBFile filename ----------------------------.
|
DB dbname ----------------------------------|
|
PROJect code dbname ------------------------|
|
SYSTEM -------------------------------------|
|
GLOBAL -------------------------------------|
|
FIles --------------------.
|
|
|
BINaryfiles --------------|
|
|
|
FORMattedfiles -----------+--- name name ---+-->
Related Commands:
RECONFIG, RCFCOPY, TO
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:54
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.40
FULL (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Gives full output from pass 2 reconfiguration.
Description:
All information output in BRIEF mode is given, plus a log of all elements successfully
created and named. FULL mode is very verbose and its use is not generally recommended.
Command Syntax:
>--- FUll --->
Related Commands:
BRIEF, VB, ERRORS
7.3.41
GENERATE (Global Project Administration - Hub only)
Function:
Generates the files required for a new location.
Description:
All the Project files are copied to a transfer directory at the Hub, ready for transmission to
the new satellite. The transfer directory is specified by the environment variable
project_locid where project is the 3-character project code and locid is the 3-character
identifier of the new location.
Before the command is given, the environment variable must be set, the transfer directory
must exist and contain the normal project sub-directories, and the transaction database for
the location must already have been created. The project Hub should have already been
initialised (or its LINIT attribute set True).
All the files in the Project will be copied to the transfer area. They must then be transferred
to the Location before the Location is initialised.
After a LOC element has been created for a new Location, the LOCID and LOCREF must
be set. The LOCID assigns a unique three-character code to the new Location. The
LOCREF defines the position of the new Location within the network by specifying its unique
parent Location.
This command sets the LINIT flag for an offline Location. The LINIT flag must be set by the
INITIALISE command for an on-line Location.
If the ALLOCATE option is specified, all the Databases allocated to the Location’s Parent
will be allocated to the new Location as well. The NOALLOCATE option means that no
databases (other than its transaction database) will be allocated to the new Location: no
database files will be copied to the transfer area.
Note: That a transaction database must have been created for the location (and for the
Hub), and the Hub must have been initialised.
When a location is generated, it will allocate the system database for that location to other
locations as part of the generation process.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:55
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
GENERATE LOCATION LON
Generates a location with identifier LON. By default, all Databases at the Hub
will be allocated to LON.
GENERATE LOCATION /LONDON
Generates a location /LONDON, allocating all databases.
GENERATE LOCATION LON NOALLOCate
Generates a location with identifier LON. No Databases will be allocated.
Note: If the location identifier contains numeric characters, it must be enclosed in quotes.
Command Syntax:
>-- GENerate LOCation <loc> --+--- ALLOCate -----.
|
|
‘--- NOALLOCate ---+-->
Related Commands:
INITIALISE
For Offline locations:
TRANSFER
Querying:
>--- Q LINIT --->
>--- Q DBALL --->
>--- Q DBPRIM --->
7.3.42
GETWORK (General PDMS Command)
Function:
Refresh view of System database, if there is more than one ADMIN user.
In Global projects, this command must be given before you can see changes made to the
Global and Transaction databases by the Global daemon. For detailed information about
when GETWORK commands are necessary, see Running Global Projects.
Command Syntax:
>--- GETWORK --->
Related Commands:
SAVEWORK
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:56
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.43
HUBLOCATION (Global Project Administration - Hub only)
Function:
Relocate Project Hub.
Description:
The specified Location becomes the new Hub.
The Location which will become the new Hub must have all DBs allocated to it using the
ALLOCATE ALL... OVERRIDE PROPG command before the HUBLOCATION command is
given. (The OVERRIDE PROPG option ensures that non-propagating databases, including
transaction databases are allocated to the new hub)
You may also wish to give a SYNCHRONISE command at the Location which will become
the Hub to bring the databases up-to-date. You are advised to backup the Global database
at the Hub before issuing this command.
The relocation can be deferred until a given time (for online Locations only).
Note: Before you give this command, the new Hub Location must have a locally
administered System database, and all constructor databases must be allocated to it
(see above). You must wait for the operation to complete: see the Global User Guide
for more information on Hub administration.
If a HUBLOCATION command fails, the previous Hub will normally be recovered
automatically. If the recovery fails (for example, the daemon is not running), you can recover
the previous Primary location using the command:
PREVOWN HUB
Use of the PREVOWN command should be avoided if possible.
Examples:
HUBLOCATION LON
Relocates the Hub to location with identifier LON.
HUBLOCATION LON AT 20:00
Relocates the Hub to location with identifier LON at 2000 hrs.
Command Syntax:
>--- HUBLOCation <loc> ---+-----------------.
|
|
‘--- AT <time> ---+--->
Related Commands:
PREVOWNER HUB, ALLOCATE ALL
Querying:
>--- Q HUBRF --->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:57
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.44
INCLUDE (Project definition)
Function:
Includes databases from another project in the current MDB. Note that the external
databases can only be accessed in Read-only mode.
In a Global Project, you can only include Databases at the Hub.
Description:
Included databases are also known as foreign databases. They are often used for sharing
Catalogues.
When creating a new Project that is required to share DBs from other Projects, there are two
important considerations:
•
Teams must exist for all DBs that are to be shared.
•
DBs in the source project that are to be shared should not be given a DB number that
will clash with a DB number that already exists in the destination project.
Examples:
INCLUDE DB MASTER/PIPECATA FROM PROJ MAS USER USERA/A
The database MASTER/PIPECATA from project MAS will be included in the current
project. The user/password (USERA/A in this example) must be a FREE user in the
source project.
INCLUDE DB MASTER/PIPECATA FROM PROJ MASTER USER FRED.
BLOGGS1/B
Similar using long project identifier and non-alphabetic username.
Command Syntax:
>---INCLude DB dbname FROM PROject projectid USer username/password--->
Related Commands:
CNAME, MOVE, CHANGE, EXCLUDE, COPY
7.3.45
INITIALISE (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Initialise communications link at an on-line Location.
Description:
This command checks for the existence of the Admin daemon at the given location and
informs the Hub that the location is on-line. The command must be given at the Location
after the files generated by the GENERATE LOCATION command have been transferred to
the Location, and the Admin daemon has been started at the Location.
Locations must be initialised before any Global activities can take place.
Note that this command is only needed for online Locations: the LINIT attribute of an offline
Location is set to TRUE by the GENERATE LOCATION command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:58
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
When you first use a Global project, it is necessary to initialise the Hub. The Hub transaction
database must be created before initialising.
Examples:
INITIALISE
Command Syntax:
>--- INITIALise --->
Related Commands:
GENERATE LOCATION
Querying:
Q LINIT
7.3.46
ISOLATION (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Isolates a Location so that no updates take place.
Description:
An isolated Location will not accept database updates from other Locations, or transfer
updates to other Locations. Note that User messages and queries are accepted, and some
commands can be passed through an isolated Location.
A Location may need to be isolated if data corruption is suspected.
Isolation commands are not recorded in the transaction database.
Examples:
ISOLATION TRUE
Isolates the current Location.
ISOLATION FALSE
Connects the current Location.
ISOLATION TRUE AT LON
Isolates the remote Location LON. This command is only available at the Hub or at
the administering location (in this example, that for LON).
ISOLATION FALSE AT LON
Connects the remote Location LON. This command is only available at the Hub or
at the administering location (in this example, that for LON).
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:59
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>--- ISOLATion ---+--- TRUE ----.
|
|
‘--- FALSE ---+--- AT <loc> ---.
|
|
‘----------------+--->
Querying:
>--- Query ISOLATion ---+--- AT <loc> ---.
|
|
‘----------------+--->
7.3.47
LIST (Querying)
Function:
Lists Project Information
Examples:
LIST
Outputs date and time.
LIST USERS
Lists the Users in a project.
LIST MDBS
Lists the Multiple Databases in a project.
LIST DBS
Lists the Databases in a project.
LIST DBS OF TYPE DESI
Lists all the Databases of type DESI in a project.
LIST TEAMS
Lists the Teams in a project.
LIST COPIES
Lists the DBs in a project which have been copied and the filenames of the copies.
LIST ALL
Lists the Users, Teams, Databases and MDBs in a project.
LIST FILES
Lists the DBs in a project and their corresponding filenames in the Project
directory.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:60
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
LIST MESSAGES
Lists inter-user messages.
LIST MODULES
Produces information on all the PDMS modules used by the project.
LIST MODULES 5
Produces information on module 5.
LIST MODULES DESIGN
Produces information on module DESIGN.
LIST MESSAGES
Lists inter-user messages.
LIST PASSWORDS
Lists users’ ids s.
LIST TYPES
Lists the types of DB currently permissible.
LIST SIZES
Gives the sizes of all the DBs in a project.
LIST EXTERNAL
Lists DBs which are being shared from another project.
LIST MACROS
Lists inter-db connection macros.
LIST AREA 51
Lists DBs in Project Area 51.
LIST WORKing EXTracts
Lists the working extracts.
LIST WORKing EXTracts FOR user
Lists the working extracts for the specified user.
LIST WORKing EXTracts dbname
Lists the working extracts for the specified DB.
LIST AUTHUSER
Lists Windows NT authenticated users.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:61
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.----------------------<----------------------.
/
|
>--- LIst ---*-----------------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- USers -------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MDBs --------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- DBs ---+--- OF TYPE type ------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘-----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- TEams -------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- FIles -------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- COpies ------------------------------------|
|
|
|
.-------<---------.
|
|
/
|
|
|--- MOdules ---*--- integer -------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--- module_name ---’
|
|
|
|
|
‘-------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MESSages ----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- ALL ---------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- PASSwords ---------------------------------|
|
|
|--- TYpes -------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- SIZes -------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MACRos ------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- AREA --- integer --------------------------|
|
|
|--- EXTernal ----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- AUTHUSERS ---------------------------------|
|
|
‘--- WORKing EXTracts --+----------.- FOR user -+--->
|
|
‘- dbname -’
Related Commands:
QUERY
7.3.48
LOAD (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Loads the reference number index from the given file.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:62
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
LOAD /DUMP1
Read reference number index from named file and replace current index.
LOAD /DUMP1 APPEND
Read reference number index from named file and append to current index.
Command Syntax:
>--- LOad ---+--- APPEND ---.
|
|
‘--------------+--- filename --->
Related Commands:
DUMP, REINIT, XREF
7.3.49
LOCK (Project Administration)
Function:
Locks the Project Database and prevents any other user from entering the database until
the project is unlocked.
In a Global Project, a Project Database can be locked remotely from the Hub.
Description:
LOCK has no effect on users already accessing a project; it simply prevents people from
entering that project. If the System Administrator is planning to execute a major change,
particularly if he is to incorporate new versions of modules, he should first LOCK the project,
then send a message to all users asking them to leave PDMS, make the required changes
when there are no users left actively in the project, and finally UNLOCK it.
Locking and Unlocking commands are not recorded in the transaction database.
Examples:
LOCK
Locks the Project database.
LOCK AT LON
Locks the Project database at the remote Location LON. Only available at the Hub
of a Global Project or at the administering location for the location (in this example,
the administering location for LON).
Command Syntax:
>--- LOCK ------>
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:63
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Related Commands:
UNLOCK
Querying:
>--- Query LOCK --->
Only available at Hub of a Global Project or at the administering location:
>--- Query LOCK ---+--- AT <loc> ---.
|
|
‘-----------------+--->
7.3.50
MAKE GLOBAL (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Make a standard Project into a Global Project.
Description:
This command splits the System database, creating a local System database and a Global
database. This format is suitable for distribution to several geographical places. The Project
becomes a Global Project with one Location, the Hub.
The Project should be locked before the MAKE GLOBAL command is issued, and unlocked
afterwards.
Note: This command should be used with care, as it alters the structure of the System
database. This process cannot be reversed using PDMS. You are advised to take a
full backup of your Project before proceeding.
For details of Global Project Administration, see the Global User Guide.
Examples:
MAKE GLOBAL
Command Syntax:
>--- MAKE GLOBAL --->
7.3.51
MAXERRORS (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Specifies the maximum number of errors found before data integrity checking is abandoned.
Note: This command should only be used when running DICE in stand-alone mode (or
REMOTE CHECK). For DICE checking within a PDMS project, use the
CHECKOPTION command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:64
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
In FULL mode, DICE checks the DB or files specified, listing all errors and warnings, until a
prescribed maximum number of errors or warnings is exceeded. Checking of that DB is then
abandoned.
The default setting for the maximum error count is 50, but you can specify a different
number by using the MAXERRORS command.
Examples:
MAXERRORS 100
Related Commands:
MODE, MAXWARNINGS
Command Syntax:
>--- MAXErrors
7.3.52
integer --->
MAXUSERS (Project Administration)
Function:
Sets the maximum number of users for a project. Note that there is no theoretical limit to the
number of simultaneous users, but a limit may be set by the current license restrictions.
Examples:
MAXUSERS 10
Command Syntax:
>--- MAXUSers integer --->
7.3.53
MAXWARNINGS (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Specifies the maximum number of warnings found before data integrity checking is
abandoned.
Note: This command should only be used when running DICE in stand-alone mode (or
REMOTE CHECK). For DICE checking within a PDMS project, use the
CHECKOPTION command.
Description:
In FULL mode, DICE checks the DB or files specified, listing all errors and warnings, until a
prescribed maximum number of errors or warnings is exceeded. Checking of that DB is then
abandoned.
The default is 50.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:65
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Example:
MAXWARNINGS 100
Related Commands:
MODE, MAXERRORS
Command Syntax:
>--- MAXWarnings
7.3.54
integer --->
MERGE CHANGES (Project Administration)
Function:
Merges the changes made to a database over several sessions.
In a Global Project, this command can only be carried out when you are administering the
Primary Location of a Database.
Description:
Sessions are defined as the work done between SAVEWORK commands. They allow you to
track the changes made to a database. If you are not interested in the history, or you want to
save disk space, you can merge the changes made in several sessions.
In a Global project, you can issue REMOTE MERGE commands if you are at the Hub or are
administering the Primary location of a database, even if that is not your current location.
See the REMOTE command for more examples.
After you merge changes, some session data is deleted. The sessions remaining are those
that you have either kept deliberately, or stamped sessions, as these cannot be merged.
With the FILEPURGE option all .SDB and .PIC files that become obsolete as of a session
merge operation will be deleted as part of the operation. This is relevant only for PADD
databases. As alternative method to delete obsolete .SDB files see User Guide Marine
Drafting / Appendices / Remove Obsolete .SDB Files.
Note: If a database owns an extract database, you cannot merge the linked session, that is
the session which was current when the extract was created.
Note: In a Global project, spurious ‘lost bucket’ errors may be reported on the master
database if there are working extracts at other locations.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:66
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
MERGE CHANGES HVAC/PADD AFTER SESSION 4 BEFORE SESSION 10
Merges all the changes to the HVAC/PADD database after session 4 and before
session 10, that is all changes made in sessions 5 to 9 will be combined. If there
are any stamped sessions in sessions 5 to 9, they will be kept. The team id (HVAC)
can be omitted if a current team is set.
MERGE CHANGES HVAC/PADD AFTER STAMP/
stamp_012 BEFORE STAMP /stamp_016
Merges all the changes to the HVAC/PADD database for sessions that are after the
session stamped with stamp_012 and before the session stamped with stamp_016.
All changes made in stamped sessions that are between the sessions stamped
with stamp_012 and stamp_016 will be combined. If there are any other stamped
sessions, they will be kept. The team id (HVAC) can be omitted if a current team is
set.
MERGE CHANGES /HVAC BEFORE 10:30 31 / 8 / 01
MERGE CHANGES /HVAC BEFORE 10:30 31 AUGUST 2001
Merges all the changes to the HVAC database before 10.30 am on the 31 August
2001. If the time is omitted, 11.59 is assumed. If the month is not given, the current
month is assumed. If the year is not given, the current year is assumed. If there are
any stamped sessions, they will be kept.
MERGE CHANGES PROJECT
Merges all the changes to all databases in the project, except stamped sessions. A
range of dates may be specified, but not a session number.
MERGE CHANGES SYSTEM
Merges all the changes to the System database. A date, session number or stamp
cannot be specified. In a Global project, you must be administering the System
database and be at its primary location.
MERGE CHANGES GLOBAL
This command is only available in a Global project, at the Hub. Merges all the
changes to the Global database. A date, session number or stamp cannot be
specified.
Command Syntax for Standard (Non-Global) project
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:67
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Note: <BEFORE/AFTER> do not apply to the SYSTEM or Global db.
Command Syntax for Global project:
where when can be given in the form of a date or a session number, or, if the required
sessions have been stamped, a stamp, as shown in the examples. See Notes on Syntax
Graphs, for the full syntax of <when>.
Note: All the MERGE CHANGES syntax except MERGE CHANGES GLOBAL can be
applied to a remote Location in a Global Project by prefixing the command by
REMOTE <loc>, where <loc> is the Location identifier. MERGE CHANGES SYSTEM
applies to the currently administered system database.
See the REMOTE command for examples.
Related Commands:
BACKTRACK, REVERT, REMOTE
Querying:
Q SESSION
7.3.55
MESSAGE (Project Administration)
Function:
Sends messages to other users.
Description:
Can be used to send a message, of up to 80 characters, to one of the following:
•
An individual user, specified by name, number or login name
•
Users on a specified workstation
•
All members of a specified team
•
All active project users
The message will be displayed only to users already in PDMS when the command is given,
and then only when they next change modules or leave PDMS.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:68
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
mess team piping ’the latest pipe routing has been approved’
Command Syntax:
>--- MEssage ----+--- ID text ------|
|--- USer userid --|
|--- TEam teamid --|
|--- HOST ---------|
|--- LOGIN --------|
‘-------------------
text ----------.
|
text ----------|
|
text ----------|
|
text ----------|
|
text ----------|
|
text ----------+-->
Querying:
LIST MESSAGE
Related Commands:
DELETE MESSAGE,
REMOTE MESSAGE (Global Projects only)
7.3.56
MODE (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Specifies what happens when DICE finds an error.
Note: This command should only be used when running DICE in stand-alone mode (or
REMOTE CHECK). For DICE checking within a PDMS project, use the
CHECKOPTION command.
Description:
There are two types of DB fault detected by DICE:
•
An error is identified if the DB is corrupted internally.
•
A warning is identified if DICE encounters, for example, a fault with a reference to an
external DB.
In BRIEF mode, checking is stopped when the first error is encountered; that is, DICE
simply determines whether or not the DB is corrupt. This is the default mode.
In FULL mode, DICE continues checking the whole DB or file, listing all errors and warnings,
until a prescribed maximum error or warning count is exceeded, when checking of that DB is
abandoned. Occasionally DICE will stop before processing the whole DB. This will happen
when the error is so severe that it is not worth continuing; for example, if a database has
been truncated.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:69
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
The default setting for the maximum error count and maximum warning count is 50, but you
can specify different numbers by using the MAXERRORS and MAXWARNINGS
commands, respectively.
Examples:
MODE BRIEF
MODE FULL
Related Commands:
MAXERRORS
Command Syntax:
>--- MOde ---+--- BRief ---.
|
|
‘--- FUll ----+--->
The default is BRIEF.
7.3.57
MODULE (Module Definition)
Function:
Creates an entry for a module in the System DB.
Description:
Command includes a variety of options, enabling the parameters of the runfile (the file
containing the binary version of the module software) to be specified. The options are
specified by the following keywords:
Examples:
OPEN
specifies a data file which the module is expecting to have opened for it.
MODE
specifies the modes (Read, Read/Write etc.) in which the various types of
DB comprising the current MDB are to be opened.
RESUME
specifies the name of the runfile of the module to be used for this project.
SECURITY
specifies the security rating of the module.
BUFFER
specifies how much space is to be reserved for the DABACON buffer. The
default value is 2560000 but the Administrator may specify a larger or
smaller value than this. Note that the buffer size should be at least this
value in projects where distributed Extracts are being used.
IMACRO
specifies the name of an initialisation macro.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:70
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Module 78
DESIGN
Security Free
Mode DESI Default
Mode PROP R
Mode CATA R
Mode DESI RW
Resume /%PDMSEXE%/des
Command Syntax:
>- MODule -+--- integer module_name -.
|
|
‘--- module_name integer -+- newline <runf> -->
where the <runf> keywords are defined as follows:
.--------------------------.
/
|
>--- Open ---*--- ATTLIB filename --------|
|
|
|--- SYMBOLFILE filename ----|
|
|
‘--- MESSagefile filename ---+-->
>--- Mode dbname ---+--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
RW --------.
|
Read ------|
|
None ------|
|
DEFault ---+--->
>--- Resume filename --->
>--- Security ---+--- FRee ---------.
|
|
‘--- GEneral ------+--->
>--- Buffer ---+--- integer -----.
|
|
‘--- DEFault -----+--->
>--- IMACRO name --->
Related Commands:
LIST MODULES, DELETE MODULES, EDIT
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:71
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Querying:
.----------------.
/
|
>--- Query MOdule ---*--- integer ------|
|
|
‘--- module_name --+---
7.3.58
MOVE (Project Administration)
Function:
Moves a DB to a different directory.
Description:
This command may be needed if disk space is a problem.
Databases can be stored in a different area, that is, a different directory from the Project
directory. The directory must be created before the database is created, and an environment
variable set to the pathname of the directory. For example:
xxxnnn
set to
pathname
where xxx is the Project Code, for example, abc, and nnn is a number, for example, 001.
When the database is created, the area number of the database must then be set to the
corresponding value, in this example, 1.
In a Global Project, this command can only be carried out at the Hub. The area directories
must exist at all Locations to which the Database is allocated.
Example:
MOVE DB HVAC/HVAC TO AREA 051
Command Syntax:
>--- MOve DB dbname TO AREA integer --->
Related Commands:
CNAME, CHANGE, INCLUDE, EXCLUDE
7.3.59
NEW (Project definition and Global Project Administration)
Function:
Create an ADMIN element.
Description:
This command is used:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:72
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
•
In any Project, to create Roles, Scopes, Teams, DB Sets and MDBs and other
elements. In a Global Project, Roles and STAMPS can only be created at the Hub.
Roles, PEROPs , STAMPS and Teams must be created in the global database.
•
At the Hub of a Global project, to create the Global elements of Locations, Location
Groups and Communication Events (LCOMDs).
Examples (any Project):
NEW ROLE /SnrPiper
Creates a new Role named SnrPiper.
NEW PEROP /MaxBore
Creates a new Permissible Operation named MaxBore. The current element must
be a Role.
NEW SCOPE /AREA-A
Creates a new Scope named Area-A.
NEW DBSET /ASET-A
Creates a new DB Set named ASET-A
NEW ACR /ACR-A
Creates a new ACR named ACR-A
NEW ACRST /ACRSET
Creates a new DB Set named ACRSET
Note: After creating the above elements, you will need to set their attributes.
NEW TTFONT TTFIND5 TTFACE ‘ARIAL’ TTFDES ‘ARIAL’
Creates a new TTFONT element for the font ‘Arial’ at index 5
NEW TTFONT TTFIND6 TTFACE ‘TIMES NEW ROMAN’ TTFDES ‘TIMES’
Creates a new TTFONT element, with description abbreviated to ‘TIMES’, at index 6.
Command Syntax (any Project):
>-- NEW ---+--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
ROLE /name -------------------------------.
|
PEROP /name -------------------------------|
|
SCOPE /name -------------------------------|
|
TEAM /name --------------------------------|
|
ACR /name ---------------------------------|
|
ACRST /name -------------------------------|
|
MDB /name ---------------------------------|
|
DBSET /name -------------------------------|
|
TTFONT integer --TTFACE text --TTDES text -+-->
7:73
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples (at the Hub of a Global project):
NEW LOCATION /CAMBRIDGE
Creates a new location named CAMBRIDGE.
NEW GRP /AUSTRALIA
Creates a Location Group named AUSTRALIA.
NEW LCOMD /NORMAL
Creates a Communications Event named NORMAL.
NEW LCTIMD /EVENTS/NORMAL
Creates an Events timing element named EVENTS/NORMAL.
Command Syntax (at the Hub of a Global project):
>--- NEW ---+--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
LOC /name -----|
|
GRP /name -----|
|
LCOMD /name ---|
|
LCTIMD /name --+--->
Related Commands:
CREATE
7.3.60
NEW STAMP (Project Administration)
Function:
Creates a new stamp element.
Description:
This command allows you to create a stamp to be used to mark database sessions. You can
stamp sessions, either by a specific time and date, or by session number. Once you have
stamped database sessions, you can use the stamp name in commands where a date or
session number can be used, such as BACKTRACK or REVERT. Stamping database
sessions makes it easier for you to:
•
make comparisons and identify changes made from session to session - for example,
you can issue drawings on which all revisions that have been made since an earlier
stamped session are highlighted
•
merge database sessions
•
backtrack a standard database to a previous session
•
revert an extract database to a previous session
•
In a Global project, stamps must be created at the Hub
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:74
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Example:
NEW STAMP /Stamp_007
Creates a new stamp named Stamp_007.
NEW STLST STLSF /*PIPEDB STSESS 7
Creates a new Stamp List for each DB in the stamp (here, PIPEDB), for session
number 7. The Stamp List holds a reference to the DB and the session number.
Any number of STLST elements can be created (or deleted). The default value of
STSESS is the current session for the DB.
Command Syntax:
.--------<---------.
/
|
>-- NEW --+-- STLST --*-- STLSF /*dbname --'--+-- STSESS dbname ---.
|
|
|
|
‘
|
|
|
‘-- STAMP /stampname ------------------------------------+--->
Related Commands:
BACKTRACK, MERGE CHANGES, REVERT
Querying:
where the current element is a stamp.
>--- Query attribute --->
7.3.61
PASSWORDLOCK
Function:
Grant or prevent the ability for users to reset their own password in Monitor.
Examples:
PASSWORDLOCK ON
PASSWORDLOCK OFF
Command Syntax:
>- PASSWORDLOCK -+- ON --->
|
'- OFF --->
Querying:
>--- Q PASSWORDLOCK -->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:75
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.62
PING (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Checks that the communications link to named Location exists.
Description:
A round-trip time will be displayed.
Example:
PING LON
Checks that communications link to Location LON exists.
Command Syntax:
>- PING <loc> --->
Note: This command is now also available in other modules, such as DESIGN and DRAFT.
Related Commands:
Q COMMS
7.3.63
PREVOWNER (Global Project Administration - Hub only)
Function:
Restores the Hub to its previous Location, or restores the previous Primary Location of a
database, if the commands to change these attributes have failed.
CAUTION:
This command should not be used, except under special circumstances
(see below).
Description:
If a CHANGE PRIMARY command on a Database fails, the Database will be left with no
Primary Location. However, the original Primary Location will be recorded, and this
command is used to restore the original Primary Location.
Similarly, if a HUBLOCATION command fails, and the Project is left with no Hub, this
command will restore the previous Hub Location.
If a SYSTEMLOCATION command fails, the PREVOWNER SYSTEM command will restore
the previous System database Location.
These three commands have built-in recovery operations to restore the previous primary
location if they fail. The PREVOWNER command is provided to enable the previous location
to be recovered in the following circumstances:
•
If the daemon is down
•
For offline locations
•
To recover a failed change primary on the location’s own transaction database
•
If the CREATE EXTRACT command fails before it has reached its Allocate Primary
command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:76
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Note: PREVOWNER is not usually needed after a failure of this command since it contains
an in-built recovery operation. However, the automatic recovery operation does not
cover the CREATE command Allocate operation and PREVOWNER may be needed
in the unlikely event of this failing.
In all other circumstances it is better to await the completion of the in-built recovery
operation, since this prevents incompatible changes being made by two competing users at
different locations.
Note: This command cannot be used to reverse a successful CHANGE PRIMARY,
HUBLOCATION or SYSTEMLOCATION command.
Examples:
PREVOWNER HUB
PREVOWNER dbname
PREVOWNER SYSTEM <loc>
Command Syntax:
>--- PREVOwner ---+--- HUB ---------------.
|
|
|--- SYSTEM <loc> ------|
|
|
‘--- dbname ------------+--->
Related Commands:
HUBLOCATION, SYSTEMLOCATION, CHANGE PRIMARY
Querying:
>--- Query PRVRF --->
This query must be used at the appropriate element. For CHANGE PRIMARY, this is
DBLOC 1 of <dbname>; for SYSTEMLOCATION, this is <loc>; for HUBLOCATION, this is
/*GL.
>--- Query NXTHB --->
If a problem occurs with the HUBLOCATION command, you can use this query at /*GL to
query NXTHB. NXTHB is used to record the future new Hub until the HUBLOCATION
command has completed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:77
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.64
PROJECT (Project definition)
Function:
Adds descriptive information to project definitions, sets project sub type i.e. Plant. Also used
to set Multibyte characters sets for fonts such as Kanji. You can, optionally, specify a second
(bold) user-defined font file for multibyte fonts.
In a Global Project, the Name, Description, Number and MBCHARSET can only be set at
the Hub. The Message can be set at all Locations.
Description:
The descriptive information will be displayed each time the project is entered. The attributes
which can be set, with their maximum number of characters, are:
NAME
119 characters
DESCRIPTION
119 characters
MESSAGE
119 characters
NUMBER
16 characters
If you require information about multibyte character sets, please contact your local AVEVA
Solutions Support Office, as listed on the copyright page of this manual.
In Marine projects, the Project numbers should match the 8-character project identifier as
defined by %ABC000ID%.
Examples:
PROJ NAME ’STABILIZER’
PROJ DESCRIPTION ’CADC TRAINING PROJECT’
PROJ MBCHAR JAPANESE
PROJ MBCHAR 87
(where 87 is the ISO Standard Font number).
PROJ MBCHAR LATIN FILE /lat_std BOLD /lat_bld
PROJ CHARSET LATIN 2
The type parameter can be used to change the project sub type between Plant and Marine.
The PROJECT TYPE ALLOWCHANGE command must be invoked first in order to activate
the project type changing capability.
PROJECT TYPE ALLOWCHANGE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:78
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>- PROJect -+-- NUMber text ------------------------------------------------.
|
|
|-- NAMe text --------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|-- DEScription text -------------------------------------------|
|
|
|-- MESsage text -----------------------------------------------|
|
|
|- MBCHARset -+- integer --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- JAPanese -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- CHInese --|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- LATIN ----+- FILE -+- name -+- BOLD name -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-------------|
|
|
|
|
‘- DEFAULT ------------|
|
|
|
‘-------------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.-------<------'
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-+- KORean ---.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘- TCHINese -+--FILE name --+- ANGLE integer ---|
|
|
|
|
‘-------------------+->
|- CHARset -+- IR integer ---------.
|
|
|
|
‘- LATIN -+- integer --|
|
|
|
|
|- CYRIllic -|
|
|
|
|
‘------------+->
|
|
`- TYPe -+- ALLOWchange -.
|
|
|- MARine ------|
|
|
`- PLAnt -------+->
Querying:
>--- Q PROject --+-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
`--
NUMber -------.
|
NAMe ---------|
|
DEScription --|
|
MESsage ------|
|
CODe ---------|
|
MBCHARset ----|
|
CHARset ------|
|
TYpe ---------+->
Q PROJ ID returns the external project identifier 8 character alphanumeric ID defined by
%ABC000ID%.
An administrator can also query the project type through the following syntax:
Q PROJ TYPE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:79
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.65
PURGE (Project Administration and Global Project Administration)
Function:
In a Global Project, removes old database files and picture files after propagation or transfer
to an offline Location. Also removes old picture files from any Project.
Description:
When updated database files and picture files are propagate or transferred, the existing
versions will be retained if Users are accessing them. The files will have the suffix .admold.
The main use of this command is to remove the old versions of these files.
The PURGE DB option removes old versions of picture files from a given Database in any
Project.
Examples:
PURGE OLD FILES
Deletes all files in the Project with the suffix .admold.
PURGE OLD FILES DB
Deletes all database files in the Project with the suffix .admold.
PURGE OLD FILES PICTURE
Deletes all picture files in the Project with the suffix .admold.
Command Syntax:
>--- PURGE ---+--- OLDfiles ---+----------------.
|
|
|
|
|--- DB ---------|
|
|
|
|
‘--- PICture ----|
|
|
‘--- DB dbname -------------------+--->
Related Commands:
TRANSFER
7.3.66
QUERY (Querying)
Function:
Used to output a wide variety of information. In general, querying options are documented
with the commands which they relate to. Some options which do not fit into this category are
listed here.
Note: That general PDMS commands for querying elements and attributes are also
available.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:80
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
Q COPIES PIPING/AREA-A
List the copies of DB PIPING/AREA-A
Q LINEWIDTHS
List the system defined line widths used in DRAFT
Q SET MDB
Q SET TEAM
Q SET DBSET
Query the set (i.e. current) Team, MDB or DB Set.
Q MOD DESIGN DRAFT 33
Query module entries for DESIGN, DRAFT and module 33.
Q DDL
Gives version number of System DDL (Design Data Language).
Q CLAIM SAMPLE/DESI
Outputs information about claimed databases.
Q NEWREF old-ref
Gives the new reference corresponding to the given old reference.
Q SESSION LAST
Outputs the date, user, and any comments saved with the given session.
Q SESSIONS ON date dbname
Q SESSIONS SINCE n dbname
Q SESSIONS LAST n dbname
Query session information on a specified database.
Q SESSIONS SINCE n
Q SESSIONS LAST n
Q SESSIONS ON date
Query session information on the current database (i.e. System or Global
database).
Q ACTIVE
Gives the active session number.
Q NACCNT
At a DB element, gives the non-additive changes count. This value increases when
a database is merged, backtracked or reconfigured. This attribute will return the
value for the system database if used at STAT /*S, or in a Global project, for the
global database if used at GSTAT /*GS.
Q HCCNT
At a DB element, gives the extract list changes count. This value increases when
extracts are inserted or removed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:81
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Note: The superseded ELCCNT pseudo-attribute is retained as a synonym for HCCNT.
HCCNT is available at /*S and /*GS elements as well as at DB elements.
Q CLCCNT
At a DB element, gives the claim list changes count. This value increases when
elements are claimed or dropped without other changes to the database.
Note: In a Global project, the above three attributes together with session information
can be used to compare the state of the database at different locations. For
information about this, see Running Global Projects with PDMS.
Querying extracts
Q DBNAME
Gives the name of the database you are actually writing to.
Q CLAIMLIST
Gives a list of user claims in your current database.
Q CLAIMLIST EXTRACT
Tells you what you can flush.
Q CLAIMLIST OTHERS
Tells you what you can't claim, including user claims and extract claims.
The following options are only available in a Global Project:
Q ADMLOC
Returns the currently administered location, which may be different from the true
current location.
Q COMMS TO LON
Query state of comms link to location LON. (Equivalent to PING)
Q COMMS LON INPUTPACKETS
Q COMMS LON OUTPUTPACKETS
Query data from comms link to location LON: Input or Output Packets.
Q COMMS LON INPUTRequests
Q COMMS LON OUTPUTRequests
Query data from comms link to named location: Input or Output Requests.
Q COMMS TO LON PATH
Query Comms routing to location LON.
Q CURLOC
Returns the true current location. This command is useful when you are remotely
administering another location: it returns the name of the actual location where you are
working.
Q ISOLAT AT LON
Returns TRUE if the location LON is isolated.
Q LOCK AT LON
Returns the project lock at location LON.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:82
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Q PROJ LOCK AT LON
Returns the project lock at location LON
Q REMOTE LON SAMPLE/DESI FILEDETAILS
Returns details of the latest session number, compaction number and other file
details for the database at the specified location. These details are used by the
Global daemon when sending a database update, and can be useful when
analysing the progress of scheduled updates.
Q REMOTE LON SAMPLE/DESI LASTSESSION
Returns Session information for the last session of the specified database at the
specified location. The output is equivalent to that from Q SESSION SAMPLE/
DESI at the current location. Note that it is not possible to query sessions other
than the latest at a remote location.
Note: Q COMMS, Q ISOLAT and Q PROJ LOCK are now available in other modules
such as DESIGN.
The following attributes are also useful:At a LOC element,
Q DBALL
lists the allocated dbs;
Q DBPRIM
lists the primary dbs;
At a DB element,
Q DBLC
lists the locations where it is allocated;
At either DB or LOC,
Q PRMLOC
indicates its Primary location
The following options are only available in a Global Project at the Hub
The daemons must be running.
Q READERS HVAC/HVAC AT CAM
Outputs a list of readers of database HVAC/HVAC at Location CAM.
Q READERS HVAC/HVAC AT CAM COUNT
Outputs a count of readers of database HVAC/HVAC at Location CAM.
Q WRITERS HVAC/HVAC AT CAM
Outputs a list of writers to database HVAC/HVAC at Location CAM.
Q WRITERS HVAC/HVAC AT CAM COUNT
Outputs a count of writers to database HVAC/HVAC at Location CAM.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:83
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>- Q --+- Authuser -------.
|
|
|- Authentication -|
|
|
|--- USer ---------|
|
|
|--- TEam ---------+--- word ------------------.
|
|
|--- DB -------.
|
|
|
|
|--- COpies ---+--- dbname --------------------|
|
|
|--- DBNO dbno --------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MDB name ---------------------------------|
|
|
|
.-------<-----.
|
|
/
|
|
|--- MOdule ---*--- integer ---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--- word ------+---------------|
|
|
|--- LOck -------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- DDL --------------------------------------|
|
|
|--- SET ---+--- TEam -------------------------|
|
|
|
|
|--- DBSet ------------------------|
|
|
|
|
‘--- MDB --------------------------|
|
|
|--- PROject ----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- SESSIONS --+-- SINCE --.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|-- LAST ---+- n --+-----------|
|
|
|
|
|
‘—- ON <date> -----+-dbname ---|
|
|
|--- CLAIM dbname -----------------------------|
|
|
|--- PASSWORDLOCK -----------------------------|
|
|
|--- NEWREF oldref ----------------------------|
|
|
|--- MAXUSers ---------------------------------|
|
|
|--- ACTIVE -----------------------------------|
|
|
|--- MACRO n ----------------------------------|
|
|
‘--- INFOrmation --+--- dbname ----------------|
|
|
‘--- SYSTEM ----------------+--->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:84
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
The following options are only available in a Global Project.
>--- Q COMMS ---+--- TO ---.
|
|
‘----------+--- <loc> ---+--- INPUTPackets ----.
|
|
|--- OUTPUTPackets ---|
|
|
|--- INPUTRequests ---|
|
|
|--- OUTPUTRequest ---|
|
|
|--- PATH ------------|
|
|
‘---------------------+-->
>-->-->-->-->-->---
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
ADMLOC --->
CURLOC --->
ISOLAT AT <loc> --->
LOCK AT <loc> --->
--+-- READERS --.
COMMS ---+--- TO ---.
|
|
‘----------+--- <loc> ---+--- INPUTPackets ----.
|
|
|--- OUTPUTPackets ---|
|
|
|--- INPUTRequests ---|
|
|
|--- OUTPUTRequest ---|
|
|
|--- PATH ------------|
|
|
‘---------------------+-->
>-->-->-->-->---
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
ADMLOC --->
CURLOC --->
ISOLAT AT <loc> --->
LOCK AT <loc> --->
--+-- READERS --.
|
|
‘-- WRITERS --+- <dbname> --.
|
|
‘-------------+--- AT <loc> --.
|
|
‘---------------+-- COUNT --.
|
|
‘-----------+-->
For details of Q REMOTE, see under REMOTE
Related Commands:
LIST, Q REMOTE
7.3.67
RCFCOPY (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Defines the part of the database to be copied from the source DB to the destination DB
before reconfiguration.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:85
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Description:
Must be given just before a RECONFIGURE command. Only elements that can exist at the
level immediately below World can be specified.
You must use RCFCOPY ALL if you intend to use the RECONFIGURE SESSIONS
command afterwards, as the SESSIONS option is not valid if you carry out partial
reconfiguration.
Examples:
RCFCOPY ALL
Copies all of the elements in the list part of WORLD in the source DB into the list
part of WORLD in the destination DB
RCFCOPY CATA
Copies the first root elements of type CATA to be copied from the list part of the
WORLD in the source DB.
RCFCOPY SPEC
Copies the first root elements of type SPWL to be copied from the list part of the
WORLD in the source DB.
RCFCOPY /SITE5A /SITE7
Copies just the named elements.
RCFCOPY <SITEA> INTO <SITEB> ALLCONNECTIONS
Sets all references, including those in the original database that are not in the list
of copied elements.
Command Syntax:
.-------------<----------------.
/
|
>- RCFCopy --*- ALL ------------.
|
|
|
|
|- CATalogue ------|
|
|
|
|
|- SPECifications -|
|
|
|
|
|- name -----------|
|
|
|
|
‘- refno ----------+-- AND ------|
|
|
|-- comma ---’
|
‘- INto -+- name --+-ALLCONnections-.
|
|
|
‘- refno -+-----------------+->
Querying:
Q COPIES
Related Commands:
FROM, TO, RECONFIG
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:86
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.68
RCFUPDATE (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Updates reference pointers into reconfigured databases.
In a Global Project, this command can only be given at the Hub.
Description:
Uses index of element reference numbers in source database against reference numbers in
destination database. The RCFUPDATE command must be given immediately following a
RECONFIGURE operation, or after a LOAD command.
Examples:
RCFUPDATE DB MASTER/DESIGN
Updates references to the reconfigured DB from DB MASTER/DESIGN.
RCFUPDATE DB MASTER/DESIGN INTERNAL
Updates references in DB MASTER/DESIGN for any elements that have been
copied with RCFCOPY. Use this option with care because it is possible to update a
reference that has already been changed by the RECONFIGURE command.
RCFUPDATE MDB /USERA
Updates references to the reconfigured DB from all appropriate DBs in MDB /
USERA
RCFUPDATE TEAM STEEL
Updates references to the reconfigured DB from all appropriate DBs owned by
team STEEL.
RCFUPDATE ALL
Updates references to the reconfigured DB from all databases in current project.
Command Syntax:
>--- RCFUPdate ---+--- DB dbname -+--------------.
|
‘-- INTERNAL --|
|
|
|--- MDB mdbname --------------|
|
|
|--- TEam teamname ------------|
|
|
|--- ALL ----------------------|
|
|
‘------------------------------+-->
Related Commands:
RECONFIGURE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:87
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.69
RCFUPGRADE (Reconfiguration)
Function:
This command is used when an upgrade to a new version of PDMS is required.
Note: This command is normally handled automatically by the upgrade macros supplied
with a new version of PDMS. You are advised to consult your AVEVA Solutions
Support Office before using it.
Command Syntax:
>-- RCFUPGRADE --+-- ON ----.
|
|
‘-- OFF ---+-->
7.3.70
RECONFIGURE (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Starts a reconfiguration operation. You can specify that the reference numbers stay the
same in the reconfigured database. You can specify that session information such as the
original session comment, session number, username and original date stays the same in
the reconfigured database.
Description:
You can specify that the reference numbers stay the same in the reconfigured database.
The SAMEREF option will fail if:
•
The database specified in the TO DB command has a different DB number from the
database given in the FROM DB command.
•
An element already exists with the same reference number.
•
You can specify that session information stays the same in the reconfigured database
by using the SESSIONS option:
•
The option is not valid for SYSTEM, or GLOBAL DBs.
•
The option is not available if you are doing a partial reconfiguration. You must use the
RCFCOPY ALL command with RECONFIG SESSIONS.
•
For extracts, RECONFIG SESSIONS will be assumed, even if the option is not given.
•
For Draft DBs, the picture files will be ignored.
•
The reconfigured data must go TO a file.
•
After reconfiguration, data can be read back in from the file, replacing the original DB
data. The SAMEREF option is assumed when reading the data.
•
When reading in data created by RECONFIG SESSIONS, the DB number and extract
number must be the same as the originating DB number and extract number.
•
If errors occur when reading in data created by RECONFIG SESSIONS, the data is not
saved unless you use the RECONFIG FORCE option.
The normal procedure for reconfiguring a database and maintaining the reference numbers
is as follows:
1. Reconfigure from the target database to a file.
2. Delete the target database, and create a new one with the same DB number.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:88
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
3. Reconfigure from the file to the new database.
For Global projects, note the following:
•
To reconfigure the Global Database in a Global Project, give the command FROM
GLOBAL followed by RECONFIGURE. For more information, see Reconfiguration.
•
In a Global Project, the TO NEW option is only valid at the Hub (see the TO command).
•
To reconfigure a satellite transaction database, reconfigure the DB to file, renew the file
to empty it (see the RENEW command), stop the daemon at the satellite, and then
reconfigure the transaction database from file. For information about reconfiguring a
transaction database, refer to Running Global Projects.
•
If the TO database is allocated to other locations, the Recover command should be
used to copy the database to all secondary locations.
Examples:
RECONFIGURE
Command Syntax:
>--- RECONfigure ---+---- FORCE ----.
|
|
|--- SESSIONS --|
|
|
‘--- SAMEREF ---+--->
Related Commands:
FROM, TO, RCFCOPY,
RENEW (Global project only)
7.3.71
RECOVER (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Recovers data when a database has been corrupted.
Description:
This command can be used on both Primary and Secondary databases, but for Primary
databases it may be better to restore the database from the latest backup copy, because the
copies at other Locations may not be up-to-date.
For a Primary database, by default recovery will be made from the most recent session at a
neighbouring (parent/child) Database. For a Secondary database, by default recovery will
be made from the neighbouring database which is first on the route to the Primary database.
Both Locations must be on-line.
Note: The Global database can sometimes be recovered using the daemon.
If the Global database for a location is corrupt or the network of locations has
changed, it cannot be recovered using the daemon, since the daemon needs to use
the Global database to understand the network. The System Administrator must
copy this database to the required locations outside PDMS. Refer to Running Global
Projects guide for detailed description of this process.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:89
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
When Reconfiguring or Renewing a database, you should then recover the database
at all its secondary locations in order to prevent reverse propagation. This also
applies if a database is replaced by one from another project. The RECOVER TO
ALL command can be used to recover a database from its primary location to all
secondary locations.
Examples:
The examples are based on the following configuration:
Secondary constructor DBs
RECOVER PIPEN/PIPEN
Recovers from BBB or DDD, whichever is the most recent.
RECOVER STEELN/STEELN
Recovers from BBB, that is the next DB on the route to the Primary Location
RECOVER STEELN/STEELN FROM DDD
Recovers from DDD.
Remote recovery of secondary constructor DBs (available from the Hub or the
administering location of the satellite)
RECOVER STEELN/STEELN AT DDD
Recovers from CCC, the only neighbouring Location in this case. If there was a
child of DDD, the recovery would be from the most recent copy.
RECOVER STEELN/STEELN AT DDD FROM BBB
Recovers DB at DDD from BBB
System DBs
RECOVER SYSTEM FOR EEE FROM BBB
Recovers System database for EEE from the copy at BBB.
RECOVER SYSTEM FROM BBB
Recovers System database for the true current location from BBB.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:90
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Remote recovery of System DBs (available at the Hub or the administering
location of the satellite)
RECOVER SYSTEM FOR EEE AT AAA FROM BBB
Recovers AAA's copy of the System database for EEE from the copy at BBB.
System DBs
RECOVER SYSTEM FOR EEE FROM BBB
Recovers System database for EEE from the copy at BBB.
RECOVER SYSTEM FROM BBB
Recovers System database for the true current location from BBB.
Remote recovery of System DBs (available at the Hub or the administering
location of the satellite)
RECOVER SYSTEM FOR EEE AT AAA FROM BBB
Recovers AAA's copy of the System database for EEE from the copy at BBB.
System DBs
RECOVER SYSTEM FOR EEE FROM BBB
Recovers System database for EEE from the copy at BBB.
RECOVER SYSTEM FROM BBB
Recovers System database for the true current location from BBB.
Remote recovery of System DBs (available at the Hub or the administering
location of the satellite)
RECOVER SYSTEM FOR EEE AT AAA FROM BBB
Recovers AAA's copy of the System database for EEE from the copy at BBB.
Recover to All Locations
RECOVER PIPEN/PIPE TO ALL
Recover a database to all allocated locations. The command can only be issued
from the HUB, the Primary location of a database or the administering location of
its Primary location.
RECOVER PIPEN/PIPE AT CCC TO ALL
Note that this will recover the database from its primary location to online
secondary locations, even if the destination is not explicitly stated. The syntax
RECOVER <DBNAME> AT <LOC> FROM <LOC> should be used to recover a
database from a secondary location.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:91
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Recover a Global database
RECOVER GLOBAL TO ALL
The user can recover a Global db from the HUB to a satellite or satellites. The
command is only available from the HUB.
RECOVER GLOBAL AT <LOC>
If the AT locations are omitted, then the database will be recovered at the Current
location from the next location on the route to the project HUB.
It is recommended that changes to the network are not distributed this way, since
results might be unpredictable. The user should refer to Running Global Projects
guide for the recommended recovery procedure.
Command Syntax:
>- RECOVer -+- SYSTEM -+-- FOR <loc> -.
|
|
|
|
‘--------------|
|
|
‘- dbname ----------------+- AT <loc> ------.
|
|
|-----------------+-- FROM <loc>--.
|-To ALLlocations-+
|
|
|
|
‘-----------------+---------------+-->
7.3.72
REINIT (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Re-initialises the reference number index.
Description:
Re-initialises the reference number index in database reconfiguration.
Command Syntax:
>--- REinit --->
Related Commands:
DUMP, LOAD
7.3.73
REMOTE (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Allows the Hub or the Administering Location of a Satellite to carry out the following tasks for
constructor or system databases at a Satellite:
•
BACKTRACK
•
REVERT
•
MERGE CHANGES
•
EXPUNGE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:92
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
•
CHECK
Other than when the REMOTE . . . CHECK command is used, the databases must be
primary at the destination Satellite.
Note: REMOTE MERGE should be considered as a Global Merge, since it affects all
available locations to which the database is allocated, including its secondary
locations.
At Global 12 you can perform Queries on the REMOTE function to allow reporting on
session details and other file details for remote satellites.
The REMOTE . . . BACKTRACK, REVERT, MERGE CHANGES and EXPUNGE commands
can be given at the Hub, the Satellite itself or the administering location. The Satellite itself
may need to use the REMOTE version of the command, because it may not have write
access to the system database. The administering Location may need to use the REMOTE
version of the command, because it may not have write access to the constructor database.
The REMOTE . . . CHECK command can be given at any location.
Certain REMOTE commands cannot be used for Extract databases - see below.
Note: The difference between the REMOTE options, and centralised administration of a
satellite, are that REMOTE commands are executed by the Global Daemon, rather
than by PDMS. All daemon commands take time to complete, and generally you will
need to wait for this to happen.
•
The REMOTE commands (other than CHECK) can only be applied to databases which
do not own extracts and to leaf extracts.
•
REMOTE . . . BACKTRACK, MERGE CHANGES and EXPUNGE commands will not
take effect while there are users (or potential users, for example, in MONITOR) in the
project.
•
REMOTE . . . BACKTRACK will do nothing if the primary location of the database
contains later sessions than the secondary database at the issuing location. It will not
backtrack through stamped sessions. The database must be allocated at the issuing
location in order to determine the latest session there.
•
If the primary database at the satellite contains later sessions than the secondary
database at the Location issuing the command, the REMOTE . . . MERGE CHANGES
command will not merge the later sessions. (If the database is non-propagating, later
sessions will be merged). REMOTE MERGE will not remove Stamped sessions.
Unless the database is non-propagating, it must be allocated at the issuing location in
order to determine the latest session there.
•
Global Merging (syntax REMOTE MERGE) also merges the database at secondary
locations after it has been merged at the primary location in order to prevent
unnecessary copying of the entire database when it is next updated. This means that
the command may take some time to complete.
•
You are advised to stop scheduled updates and avoid adhoc updates until the entire
Global MERGE command (syntax REMOTE MERGE) has completed for the database.
If scheduled updates are left in place, then unnecessary copying of entire databases
will be undertaken, and changes made by users at the primary location may be lost.
•
The parameter syntax REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES GLOBALDB where <loc> is
the project hub can be used to merge a Global Database. The Remote Merge
command can be scheduled by using the AT parameter show in the following
examples.
•
The REMOTE . . . CHECK command can be given at any location on any database.
Both Primary and Secondary databases can be checked. This command runs stand-
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:93
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
alone DICE on the specified database from the daemon at the specified location and
reports back to the location that issued the command.
•
However, extract databases cannot usefully be checked in isolation (using CHECK
FILE), since access to the extract owner is required. This means that REMOTE
CHECK cannot be used on Extract databases other than the extract master.
•
You can also query information about the project status at a Satellite. See Querying
below.
•
REMOTE EXPUNGE cannot distinguish between genuine and dead users of a
database at a location. The system administrator should use remote session
information (see Querying below) to check which users are actually writing to the
database.
•
REMOTE MERGE and REMOTE BACKTRACK are not valid for extracts which own
other extracts. However, REMOTE REVERT and REMOTE EXPUNGE can be used. A
database that owns extracts must be merged in PDMS using the MERGE command.
Examples:
For details of time and date syntax, see Notes on Syntax Graphs.
BACKTRACK
REMOTE <loc> BACKTRACK dbname TO 14:30
REMOTE <loc> BACKTRACK dbname TO SESS 17
Backtracks changes to the given database, which must be Primary at the
named location. A database cannot be backtracked through a stamp.
REVERT
REMOTE <loc> REVERT dbname TO 14:30
REMOTE <loc> REVERT dbname TO SESS 17
Adds a session reverting to the data at the specified session or date. The
database must be Primary at the named location.
MERGE CHANGES
REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES dbname BEFORE 31 MARCH
REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES dbname BEFORE SESSION 9 AFTER SESSION 4
Merges changes to the given database, which must be Primary at the named
location. Stamped sessions will not be removed by the merge.
REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES SYSTEM
Merges changes to the system database for the location <loc>.
REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES SYSTEM FOR <loc2>
Merges changes to the system database for <loc2>, which must be
administered by <loc>.
REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES <dbname> AT 23:00 <mergeoptions>
Merge changes at a specified time, in this case at 23:00 hours. Where
<merge-options> are the normal Before/After session information described
above.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:94
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
REMOTE <loc> MERGE GLOBALDB
Merges the Global database at location <loc>.
EXPUNGE
REMOTE <loc> EXPUNGE
REMOTE <loc> EXPUNGE username
Expunges all users or the given user from the communications database at
the given Location. username is the PDMS username.
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
<loc>
<loc>
<loc>
<loc>
EXPUNGE
EXPUNGE
EXPUNGE
EXPUNGE
DB
DB
DB
DB
dbname
dbname USER username
SYSTEM
SYSTEM FOR <loc2>
Expunges all users or the given user from the given database at the given
Location. The database must be primary at the given Location. Username
can be the PDMS username or a session number.
DICE Checking
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
<loc>
<loc>
<loc>
<loc>
<loc>
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
SYSTEM
DB dbname
MISCDB dbname
COMMDB
SYSTEMDB FOR <loc2>
Performs a standalone DICE check on the given database at the given
Location. The database does not need to be primary at the given Location.
The check uses the current MODE, STATISTICS, MAXERRORS and
MAXWARNINGS settings.
Cancelling commands
REMOTE <loc> CANCEL <gid>
Allows an Admin user to cancel a command at another Location <loc>, where
<gid> is a TRINCO in the transaction database for the given Location (this is
not the current Location, unless <loc> is the current Location). This command
requires an up-to-date version of the transaction database for Location <loc>
to be available at the current Location. (The transaction database is not
normally propagated. It is best to RECOVER this database from the primary
location rather than to SYNCHRONISE it.)
Note: Only commands which have not started can be cancelled.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:95
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
For details of <loc> and <when> syntax, see Notes on Syntax Graphs.
>- REMOTE <loc> BACKTRACK dbname TO <when> -->
>- REMOTE <loc> REVERT dbname TO <when> -->
>- REMOTE <loc> MERGE CHANGES +--- dbname ----------------.
+--- GLOBAL ----------------|
.---------.
+--- SYSTEM -+- FOR <loc> --| /
|
`--------------+--+-<options>-+
`--->
where <options> is:--+--BEFORE <when>---.
+--AFTER <when>----|
+--AT <date>-------|
`------------------+--->
REMOTE (continued)
>- REMOTE <loc> EXPUNGE -+- USER username ----------------------.
|
|
|--------------------------------------|
|
|
‘- DB --+- dbname -+-- USER username --|
|
|
|
|
‘-------------------|
|
|
‘- SYSTEM -+-- FOR <loc2> -----|
|
|
‘-------------------+-->
>- REMOTE <loc> CHECK --+-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
|
|
‘--
DB dbname ------------------------.
|
MISCDB --------------------------|
|
COMMDB --------------------------|
|
SYSTEMDB dbname -+- FOR <loc2> ---.
|
|
‘----------------|
|
GLOBALDB -------------------------+-->
Related Commands:
CANCELCOMMAND, REMOTEMESSAGE, MERGE, REVERT, BACKTRACK, EXPUNGE,
CHECK
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:96
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Querying:
Remote database session information can be queried using the Q REMOTE command:
Q REMOTE <loc> <dbname> FILEDETAILS
Would return:
Compaction number 104
Last session 142
Header changes count 0
Claim list changes count 0
Last page 139
Q REMOTE <loc> <dbname> LASTSESSION
Would return:
Session 142:
Date: 14:52 04 Feb 2009 User: fred.bloggs Description:
Default session comment
Note: When used in syntax for variables, the data from the query is returned in CSV format,
suitable for export to a spreadsheet (this applies to both FILEDETAILS and
LASTSESSION).
The success of database updates may be monitored using these queries. These allow
comparison of the state of the database at different locations.
Where <dbname> can be one of:
•
GLOBAL
•
SYSTEM
•
SYSTEM FOR LOCAL
•
SYSTEM FOR <loc>
The Global banner at a remote location can be queried using:
Q REMOTE <loc> BANNER
An example output would be:
AVEVA Global Mk12.0.0.1 (WINDOWS-NT 5.1) (Mar 6 2009)
Information about remote users of PDMS may be queried using remote session objects. For
example:
!p = current project
Returns a PROJECT object
!l = !p.locations()
Returns an array of LOCATION objects
!r = !l[2].sessions()
Returns an array of SESSION objects for the specified LOCATION
Only the following SESSION object methods are valid for a session at a remote location
(where !l[2] is not the current location)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:97
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
q var !r[1]
The below example output is the Daemon itself
<SESSION> 149c-PC526
ENTERED <STRING> '10:09:26 Tue, 3
Mar 2009'
HOST <STRING> 'PC526'
ISCURRENT <BOOLEAN> FALSE
ISREMOTE <BOOLEAN> TRUE
LOCATIONNAME <STRING> '/LONDON'
LOGIN <STRING> 'SYSTEM'
NAME <STRING> 'globaldaemon - Global Daemon'
UNIQUEID <STRING> '149c-PC526'
q var !r[1].module()
example of user() query (from the above session):
<STRING> 'GLOBALDAEMON';
q var !r[1].user()
e.g. (from the above session):<USER> SYSTEM
ACCESS <STRING> 'Free'
DESCRIPTION <STRING> ''
NAME <STRING> 'SYSTEM'
REFNO <STRING> '=24575/668'
q var !r[1].mdb().
e.g. (from the above session)
<MDB> Unset - Unset
DESCRIPTION <STRING> Unset
NAME <STRING> Unset
REFNO <STRING> Unset
We can thus query which MDBs which users are using in which
modules at location <loc>
This may be combined with information about the satellite MDBs to identify users of a
database when using REMOTE…EXPUNGE.
For more information about PML Objects see the Software Customisation Reference
Manual. Only these three session methods are available for remote sessions.
7.3.74
REMOTEMESSAGE (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Sends messages to users at other Locations.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:98
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
REMOTEMessage <loc> ALL text
Send message to all users at named location
REMOTEMessage <loc> TEAM teamid text
Send message to all members of a team at named location
REMOTEMessage <loc> FREEUSER text
Send message to administrator at a named location
Command Syntax:
>--- REMOTEMessage <loc> ---+--- ALL -------------.
|
|
|--- FREEuser --------|
|
|
‘--- TEam teamid -----+--- text --->
Related Commands:
MESSAGE, LIST MESSAGE
Querying:
>--- Query DBALL ---> at a LOC queries the databases allocated to a location;
>--- Query DBPRIM ---> at a LOC queries the databases primary at a location;
>--- Query DBLC ---> at a DB element queries the locations to which the database is
allocated;
>--- Query PRMLOC ---> at a DB or LOC element queries its Primary location
7.3.75
REMOVE (Project definition)
Function:
Removes the specified DB from the MDB.
Examples:
REMOVE SERV/AREA-D
Command Syntax:
.------------.
/
|
>-- REMove dbname ---*--- dbname ---’
|
‘-------------------->
Related Commands:
ADD, REMOVE, CURRENT, DEFER
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:99
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.76
RENEW (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Deletes a transaction database and creates a fresh version.
Description:
If a transaction database becomes corrupt, it may be necessary to delete it and then recreate it. Existing commands in the database may be retained by Reconfiguring to file
before the Renew and from file after the Renew.
This daemon command is available with two options, namely DELETE and AT. It deletes an
existing transaction database file at a Location and creates a fresh version.
The RENEW DELETE <DB> command is the preferred method of re-creating the
transaction database file, as it works even when the database is too corrupt for the daemon
to run. Note that <DB> must be the transaction database for the current location, as the
command cannot be executed remotely.
When this command is used, ADMIN checks that all users have left PDMS and that the
daemon has been shut down. Note that the check on the daemon takes up to 3 minutes.
ADMIN then deletes the file for the transaction database (not its DB entry) and prompts the
user to leave PDMS and restart the daemon. When the daemon is restarted, it will
automatically recreate the transaction database file.
The RENEW <DB> AT <loc> command may be used to renew a transaction database
remotely. Note that this command may fail, if the database corruption is severe and the
daemon at <loc> cannot be started. All users must be out of PDMS for the command to run.
Alternatively, you may renew the transaction database by stopping the daemon and deleting
its file outside PDMS (not its DB definition). The daemon will automatically create a new
transaction database file when it is restarted.
It is recommended that, after renewing, the System Administrator should recover the
transaction database at all secondary locations. This will prevent reverse propagation.
For further information about reconfiguring or renewing a transaction database, see
Running Global Projects with PDMS.
The RENEW command is not recorded in the transaction database.
Examples:
RENEW DELETE <db>
Renews the transaction DB at the current location
RENEW TRANSACTION/LON AT LON
Renews the transaction DB for London at location London
Command Syntax:
>--- RENEW ---+-- DELETE ----- dbname -----.
|
|
‘-- dbname --- AT <loc> -----+--->
Related Commands:
RECONFIGURE, RECOVER
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:100
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.77
REORDER (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Reorders the members list of an element.
In a Global Project, this command is particularly useful for Databases, as the list order at a
location determines the order in which Databases are propagated. For example, a
Catalogue database should be propagated before any Design Databases which reference it.
Examples:
REORDER 2 BEFORE 1
Command Syntax:
>-- REORDer element_id --+--- BEFore ---.
|
|
‘--- AFTer ----+-- list_position -->
7.3.78
REPAIR (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Repairs the System database, to remove deleted global elements including deleted
databases.
Note: you will not be prompted to carry out a Repair as a result of the system finding deallocated databases. This results from using DEALLOCATE with the KEEPMDBS
option.
In a Global Project, this command may be used to Repair or Check Repair needed to the
System database. There are four main commands:•
Q REPAIR - required - Returns an integer indicating the number of illegal entries in the
System database.
•
REPAIR - outputs a report and Repairs the database.
•
REPAIR NOCHECK - Repairs the database without a report.
•
REPAIR CHECKONLY - Outputs a report without Repairing the database.
The latter is useful when using ADMIN in READONLY mode, as at a satellite with a
secondary system database.
Examples:
Q REPAIRREQUIRED
REPAIR
REPAIR CHECKONLY
REPAIR NOCHECK
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:101
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>-- REPAIR ---+-----------------.
|
|
+--- NOcheck -----+
|
|
‘----CHECKonly----+----->
Related Commands:
DEALLOCATE
7.3.79
REPLICATE (Project definition)
Function:
Saves the project in a file so it can be replicated.
Description:
This command can be used:
•
To replicate the complete Project, including all data (except the ISO subdirectories), to
a new project. You use the REPLICATE command to do this.
•
To replicate the structure of a standard (non-global) project to file. You use the
REPLICATE SYSTEM command to do this.
•
To replicate the structure of a global project to file:
•
Use REPLICATE SYSTEM to replicate the structure of the project at the current
location.
•
Use REPLICATE SYSTEM STANDALONE to replicate the project as a standard
project, omitting references to Locations and communications.
•
Use REPLICATE SYSTEM SATELLITE at a Satellite in a global project to replicate
the project as represented in the local System database. That is, the local
information about Users, MDBs and Communication Events will be stored, but not
the elements which can only be created and deleted at the Hub.
The file created by REPLICATE SYSTEM can be run as a macro in ADMIN. The
REPLICATE SYSTEM command causes ADMIN to scan the System database (and Global
database) and output to the named file all the commands necessary to recreate the project
structure.
In a Global project, the file created contains macros that should be run in two stages:
The first stage creates the basic project structure and generates the satellite locations. The
macro then terminates.
You should then edit the remainder of the file into a new file to be run as a separate macro,
which should not be run until satellites have been created and initialised.
The second stage allocates databases to satellites and makes the relevant databases
primary at satellites.
Before you run the macro to recreate the project structure, you must ensure that suitable
project variables have been defined. In a Global project, this must include transfer
directories for each satellite (for more details, see the TRANSFER command).
Note: It is strongly recommended that this is only done in a newly created project,
otherwise results could be unpredictable.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:102
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
REPLICATE XYZ
Copies all data from the current project directories into directories for a project
named XYZ. In a Global project, a new UUID value for the Project is set (stored in
ADUUID of /*GL; this is because each project requires a unique value of this
attribute. This is used by Global daemons to distinguish between projects at the
same location).
REPLICATE F123
In this case the long project identifier (%ABC000ID%) has been specified. This will
replicate to the underlying project path of which this variable is associated, i.e the
path that %ABC000% maps to.
Note: A new UUID value may be queried at /*GL using Q NEWUID. The administrator may
use this value to set ADUUID manually if a Global project has been copied externally
to PDMS.
If ADUUID is left unchanged, there may be data corruption since daemons may send
data to the wrong project.
The ADUUID attribute is essential to distinguish between Global projects. Each
project should have a unique value of ADUUID. This value is what the Global
daemon uses to select the correct project.
For example if the user copies a project using the file system, rather than by using
the REPLICATE command, then the ADUUID attribute in both projects will be the
same, and this may cause commands from one Global project to be received by the
wrong Global project.
It is therefore essential that the PDMS Administrator resets the ADUUID attribute of
the project. The NEWUID attribute provides a way to get a new value, since it makes
a 'uuidgen' query. The Administrator can then use the result of the NEWUID attribute
query to set the ADUUID attribute. Note that NEWUID is not an attribute of the
database. It is a pseudo-attribute provided for the purpose of generating a new uid
value for ADUUID.
/*GL
!N=NEWUID
ADUUID=$!N
REPLICATE SYSTEM filename
Generate macro to replicate the project structure. If the current project is Global,
the macro will include Location and Communication details.
REPLICATE SYSTEM /filename FILENUMBERS
Generate macro in a file /filename to replicate the complete data in the current
project, maintaining the same file numbers.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:103
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
REPLICATE SYSTEM /filename OVERWRITE
Generate macro to replicate the complete data in the current project. The data will
be saved in the named file. If the file exists, it will be overwritten.
REPLICATE SYSTEM STANDalone filename
Generate macro to replicate the project setup for a stand-alone (non-Global)
project. This omits all references to Locations and Communication elements.
REPLICATE SYSTEM SATELLite filename
Generate macro to replicate the project setup for a satellite of a Global project.
Outputs the commands for building the System database only, not the Global
database, that is, Teams, DBs and Locations are omitted.
Command Syntax for a Standard (non-global) project:
>-- REPLICATE -+- code ----------------------------.
|
|
‘- SYSTEM filename -+- FILENumbers -|
|
|
‘---------------+- OVERwrite -.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
Command Syntax for a Global project:
>- REPLICATE -+-code-----------------------------------------.
|
|
‘-SYSTEM-+-STANDalone-.
|
|
|
|
|-SATELLite--+------------------------ |
|
|
|
‘------------+-filename-+-FILENumbers-|
|
|
‘-------------+-OVERwrite--.
|
|
‘------------+-->
The FILENumbers option maintains the same file numbers.
The OVERWRITE option overwrites an existing file of the same name.
7.3.80
RESETXREFS (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Controls a partial update of references following a multi-database reconfiguration.
Note: This command is normally handled automatically by the upgrade macros supplied
with a new version of PDMS. You are advised to consult your AVEVA Solutions
Support Engineer before using it.
Description:
Updates the cross-references listed in a file created by the XREF command. Can be used
when upgrading a project from one version of PDMS to the next.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:104
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
RESETXREFS WITH /REFFILE RESOLVE DB MASTER/DESNEW
where /REFFILE is the name of the file generated by the XREF command and
MASTER/DESNEW is the corresponding DB to be updated.
Command Syntax:
>-- RESETxrefs --+-- WIth --.
|
|
‘----------+-- name --*-- RESOLve --+-- DB --.
|
|
|
|
‘--------+-- dbname --.
|
|
‘-- END ----------------------------+-->
Related Commands:
XREF, LOAD, RCFUPDATE DB
7.3.81
REVERT (Project Administration)
Function:
Allows you to restore a database to a previous session.
Description:
This command is similar to the BACKTRACK command. Sessions are defined as the work
done between SAVEWORK commands. You can revert to the date or session number
required, or, if the required session has been stamped, you can revert to the stamp. The
current state of the database will be lost.
Any elements which are claimed out to users or extracts must exist in the backtracked
session.
This command has a different effect from BACKTRACK. Instead of truncating the database,
a new session is added that is a copy of the required session. This means that unlike
BACKTRACK, REVERT can always be reversed.
Examples:
REVERT PIPE/PIPE to 10:30
Reverts database to the session current at 10:30.
REVERT PIPE/PIPE to 31 MAY
Reverts database to the session current on 31st May.
REVERT PIPE/PIPE to SESS 10
Reverts database to the session 10.
REVERT PIPE/PIPE to STAMP /stamp_012
Reverts database PIPE/PIPE to the session that has the stamp /stamp_012.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:105
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>-- REVERT dbname to <when> --->
Related Commands:
BACKTRACK, MERGE CHANGES,
REMOTE REVERT (Global project only)
7.3.82
SAVEWORK (General PDMS Command)
Function:
Updates the System database.
Description:
Some commands automatically do a SAVEWORK command. These are:
REPLICATE project
MERGE CHANGES SYSTEM
On Global projects:
ALLOCATE
DEALLOCATE
HUBLOCATION
CHANGE PRIMARY
PREVOWNER HUB
SYSTEMLOC
GENERATE LOCATION
ADMINISTER
CREATE EXTRACT
CREATE WORKING EXTRACT
MERGE CHANGES GLOBAL
Command Syntax:
>--- SAVEWORK --->
Related Commands:
GETWORK, FINISH
7.3.83
SET (Project definition and Global Project Administration)
Function:
Sets the current administrative element.
Description:
Set the specified MDB, DB Set or Team as the current one for the addition or removal of
DBs or users, respectively.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:106
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
•
Once a team has been set, DBs owned by that team can be referred to by using the
database part of the name only.
•
ADD, DEFER, REMOVE, CURRENT and EXCHANGE require an MDB to be set.
•
Databases can only be added to a DB set once the DB Set has been specified.
Examples:
SET MDB /RAB
Sets current MDB as RAB.
SET DBSET /ASET
Sets current DB Set as ASET.
SET TEAM PIPING
Sets current team as PIPING. Abbreviated references to the DBs /AREA-A, /AREAB etc. will automatically be taken as references to the actual DBs PIPING/AREA-A,
PIPING/AREA-B etc.
Command Syntax:
>--- SET ----+--- MDB name ------.
|
|
|--- DBSET name ----|
|
|
‘--- TEAm name -----+--->
Querying:
>--- Query SET --+--- MDB ----.
|
|
|--- DBSET --|
|
|
‘--- TEAM ---+--->
Related Commands:
CREATE, ADD, DADD
7.3.84
SORTALLOCATE
Function:
Re-orders database extracts in a database allocation list
Description:
Re-orders database extracts in a location’s allocation list into the correct extract order, so
that extract children follow the parent extract. This affects the order in which database
updates are sent.
Note: This command does not sort the order of unrelated databases. It is up to the system
administrator to ensure a sensible order.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:107
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
Command Syntax:
SORTALLOCATE loc
Querying:
Q DBALL to query an allocation list.
Related Commands:
ALLOCATE, DEALLOCATE, Q DBALL
7.3.85
STATISTICS (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Produces a summary of information about the database being checked.
Note: This command should only be used when running DICE in stand-alone mode (or
REMOTE CHECK). For DICE checking within a PDMS project, use the
CHECKOPTION command.
Description:
STATISTICS ON causes DICE to produce a statistical summary of the DB, including its size,
the number of elements contained within it, etc.
STATISTICS OFF specifies that no statistics are to be gathered during the checking. This is
the default setting.
Examples:
An example of the output from DICE when statistics are requested is as follows:
OVERALL STATISTICS
==================
Total no. of entries in Name Table = 111
Total no. of elements checked = 782
Total no. of ref attributes found = 726
Total no. of external references = 0
Command Syntax:
>--- STATistics ---+--- OFF ----.
|
|
‘--- ON -----+--->
STATISTICS OFF specifies that no statistics are to be gathered during the checking. This is
the default.
7.3.86
STATUSSESSION (Querying)
Function:
Gives information about your current status and the database to which you have access.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:108
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
An example of output is shown below.
Project:
User: HVAC (75dws52)
Teams: HVAC
MDB: /HVAC
Command Syntax:
>--- STATUSSession -->
Related Commands:
SYSTAT
7.3.87
STOP (Data Integrity Checking)
Function:
Exits from DICE when it is running in stand-alone mode.
Examples:
STOP
Related Commands:
FINISH has the same effect
Command Syntax:
>--- STOP --->
7.3.88
SYNCHRONISE (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Updates databases with the changes from another location.
Description:
This command updates one, all or a set of databases at an on-line Location with the
changes in the corresponding databases at another location. The set of databases may be
specified by DBSET or MDB elements as well as by an explicit list.
By default, the updates will be taken from the Primary Location, but the Hub Administrator
can specify that they will be taken from another Location which is an immediate neighbour
of the Location requiring the updates.
Unlike UPDATE, the transfer is one-way only: the synchronising Location only receives
updates, it does not send them. All Locations in the communications network between the
two Locations being synchronised will also be updated.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:109
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Note that if the more up-to-date database has been compacted, that is, sessions have been
merged, or if it has been backtracked, the entire database will be transferred.
Updates for offline Locations can only come from the Hub.
Examples of synchronisation of constructor databases:
SYNCHRONISE STEELN/STEELN
Synchronise given database at current location with its Primary location.
SYNCHRONISE ALL
Synchronise all databases at current location with their Primary locations.
SYNCHRONISE STEELN/STEELN AT LON
Synchronise given database at location LON with its Primary location.
SYNCHRONISE ALL AT LON
Synchronise all databases at location LON with their Primary locations.
SYNCHRONISE STEELN/STEELN WITH LON
Synchronise given database at current location with location LON.
SYNCHRONISE STEELN/DRAWINGS DRAWINGS/ONLY (FORCE/PICFD)
Synchronise drawing-files for a Drawings database (PADD or SCHE). This
command allows the drawing-files to be transferred without a database update.
This can be useful if a database update has been succeeded without updating its
drawings. If the FORCE/PICFD option is specified, then the PICFD attribute of the
database is ignored and all drawings will be synchronised. This command can only
be used on individual databases, and not with the DBLIST option.
SYNCHRONISE ALL WITH LON
Synchronise all databases at current location with location LON.
SYNCHRONISE STEELN/STEELN AT LON WITH CAM
Synchronise single database at location LON with location CAM.
Examples of synchronisation of system databases:
SYNCHRONISE SYSTEM WITH CAM
Synchronise the System Database for the current Location with location CAM
SYNCHRONISE SYSTEM AT LON WITH CAM
Synchronise the System Database for the current location at location LON with
location CAM
SYNCHRONISE SYSTEM FOR OXF AT LON WITH CAM
Synchronise the System Database for OXF at location LON with location CAM
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:110
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples of synchronisation of the global database:
SYNCHRONISE GLOBAL WITH CAM
Synchronise the Global Database at the current Location with location CAM
SYNCHRONISE GLOBAL AT LON WITH CAM
Synchronise the Global Database at location LON with location CAM
SYNCHRONISE GLOBAL AT OXF
Synchronise the Global Database at OXF with the current location.
Examples of synchronisation of the global database using DBLIST:
SYNCHRONISE DBLIST <update-list> <synchronise-options>
To SYNCHRONISE a set of databases use a lists of DBs, MDBs, or DBSETs.
These are passed to the daemon as a list of DB element names:
•
Where <update-list> may contain one or more of the following –
•
DB <dbnam>
•
GLOBAL/DB
•
SYSTEM/DB FOR <locnam>
•
<element-id>
Valid elements include MDB, DBSET, DB or LOC elements;
SYNCHRONISE DBLIST MDB/ATEST AT OXF;
Synchronise all the databases in MDB/ATEST that are allocated but not primary at
OXF
SYNCHRONISE DBLIST DBSET /FRED WITH CAM;
Synchronise all the databases in DBSET/ FRED that are allocated but not primary
at CAM
SYNCHRONISE DBLIST GLOBAL SYSTEM FOR LON AT CAM;
Synchronise the Global database and the LON System database at CAM
SYNCHRONISE DBLIST STEELN/STEEL PIPEN/PIPE AT OXF
Synchronise the STEELN/STEEL and PIPEN/PIPE databases at OXF. The
Primary location must not be OXF
Examples of synchronisation of the global database using linked document
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:111
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
propagation:
For a DESIgn database:
SYNCHRONISE DBNAME LINKDOCUMENTS {FORCE|NOFORCE} (AT
<Locname>)
For DRAFT or SCHE databases
SYNCHRONISE DBNAME DRAWINGS/ONLY {FORCE|NOFORCE} (AT
<Locname>) (WITH <Locname>)
For example:
SYNCHR CTBATEST/DESI LINKDOC AT CAM
SYNCHR CTBATEST/PADD DRAWINGS FORCE
The keyword FORCE has a slightly different meaning for the two cases:
For drawing databases, force will copy non-propagating drawings such as picture files
even if their propagation has been disabled.
For Linked Documents, the files will be transferred to the secondary location even if they
already exist, thus updating them.
Command Syntax:
>- SYNCHronise -+- dbname --------------------.
|
|
|
.------<-------.
|
|
/
|
|
|-- DBLIST --<update-list>-+- -|
|
|
|--- SYSTEM -+- FOR -+-- LOCAL -|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘-- <loc> -|
|
|
|
|
‘------------------|
|
|
|--- GLOBAL --------------------|
|
|
‘- ALL -------------------------+- AT <loc> --.
|
|
‘-------------+- WITH <loc> -.
|
|
‘--------------+--->
The <linkdoc> can be as follows:>-SYNCHRONISE-+-dbname-+-LINKDOC/UMENTS---.
|
|
+- DRAWINGS/ONLY --+-+-FORCE-.
‘------------------|---------|
‘---------+-AT <loc>-.
|
|
‘----------+-WITH <loc>-.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:112
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
The <update-list> can be as follows:<update-list>--+--GLOBALdb --------------------.
|
|
|--SYSTEM-- --|-- FOR ---<loc>--|
|
`-----------------|
|-- DB ---<dbname>--------------|
|
|
`-- <element-id>----------------+--->
The <element-id> may be an MDB, DBSET, DB or LOC.
Related Commands:
UPDATE, RECOVER
7.3.89
SYSTAT (Querying)
Function:
Gives information about users accessing the project.
Description:
Lists all users who are accessing the project, the modules and databases which they are
using, and whether they have Read-only or Read/Write access to the database. It also gives
the login id and workstation identifier. You can select what information you want output: see
the following examples.
Examples:
The following is an example of output:
PROJECT SAM
=============
User HVAC (75d-computer1)
Name au (A.User)
Host computer1
Entered 14:37 10 Sep
Module DESIGN
MDB /HVAC
DB
HVAC/DESI
HVAC/PADD
HVAC/CATA
MASTER/IPECATA
ASTER/STLCATA
MASTER/HVACCATA
MASTER/SUPPCATA
MASTER/PADD
MASTER/DICT
MASTER/PROP
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
MODE
RW
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
7:113
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
User HANGER (3c41-computer2)
Name an (A.N. Other)
Host computer2
Entered 14:39 10 Sep
Module DRAFT
MDB /HANGERS
DB
HANGERS/DESI
HANGERS/PADD
HANGERS/CATA
ASTER/PIPECATA
MASTER/STLCATA
MASTER/HVACCATA
MASTER/SUPPCATA
MASTER/PADD
MASTER/DICT
MASTER/PROP
MODE
R
RW
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
2 user(s) listed
This shows that two users are using Project SAM:
•
User HANGER who is using DRAFT, and has Read/Write access to the Draft database
HANGERS/PADD.
•
User HVAC who is using DESIGN, and has Read/Write access to the Design database
HVAC/DESI.
In a Global project, there may also be a SYSTEM user running the Globaldaemon module.
This shows that the daemon is running.
You can restrict the output to information about the user, host, module or MDB as shown in
the following examples:
SYS USER HVAC
Lists the information for the user HVAC
SYS NAME an
Lists the information for the user id an
SYS HOST ’computer1’
Lists the information for the host computer
SYS MODULE DRAFT
Lists the information for any users of DRAFT
SYS MDB HVAC
Lists the information for any users of the MDB HVAC
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:114
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>--- SYStat ---+----------------------.
|
|
|--- USER username ----|
|
|
|--- NAME ’loginid’ ---|
|
|
|--- HOST ’hostid’ ----|
|
|
|--- MODUle module ----|
|
|
‘--- MDB name ---------+--->
Related Commands:
STATUSSession, EXPUNGE
7.3.90
SYSTEMLOCATION (Global Project Administration - Hub Only)
Function:
Changes the Administering Location of a Satellite.
Description:
The SYSTEMLOC command changes the primary location of the System database for the
specified location. The primary location of the Hub system database cannot be changed: the
Hub cannot be administered remotely.
•
The SYSTEMLOC command cannot complete while there are users in PDMS with
write access to the system database. The command will eventually complete once all
such users have left PDMS. You may need to use EXPUNGE to remove phantom
users.
If a SYSTEMLOC command fails, the previous primary location will normally be recovered
automatically. If the recovery fails (for example, the daemon is not running), you can recover
the previous Primary location using the command:
PREVOWN SYSTEM AT locname
Use of the PREVOWN command should be avoided if possible.
Offline locations:
An offline Location can only be administered by the Hub or the Location itself. Once an
offline Location has been initialised, you can only change the administering Location from
the Hub to the Location, not from the Location to the Hub.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:115
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
SYSTEMLOCation LON PRIMARY AT OXF
Changes the Primary Location of the Location LON to be the Location OXF, so that
LON can be administered from OXF.
SYSTEMLOCation OXF LOCAL
Changes the Primary Location of the Location LON to be at LON, so that LON can
be administered locally.
SYSTEMLOCation OXF HUB
Changes the Primary Location of the Location OXF to be the Hub.
Command Syntax:
>-- SYSTEMLOCation <loc> --+-- PRIMARY AT <loc> --.
|
|
|-- LOCAL -------------|
|
|
‘-- HUB ---------------+-->
Related Commands:
ADMINISTER, PREVOWNER SYSTEM
Querying:
>--- Q PRMLOC --->
At a Location, shows the Primary Location for the Location.
>--- Q PRVRF --->
At a Location, shows the previous primary location until the SYSTEMLOC command has
completed. This attribute is normally unset.
7.3.91
TADD (Project definition)
Function:
Adds users to the Set (i.e. Current) team.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:116
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
TADD SJC
Add user SJC to the current Team.
Command Syntax:
.------<-----.
/
|
>--- TADD userid ---*--- userid ---’
|
‘----------------->
Related Commands:
TREMOVE, SET
7.3.92
TERM (General PDMS Command)
Function:
Terminates Alpha file.
Examples:
TERM
Terminates alpha file and outputs reports to screen. This syntax is equivalent to
ALPHA FILE END
Command Syntax:
>--- TERM ----->
Related Commands:
ALPHA
7.3.93
TO (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Specifies the destination database for reconfiguration.
In a Global Project, the TO NEW option can only be used at the Hub. The TO DB option can
only be used at the Primary Location of a database. When reconfiguring the location’s own
transaction database (using TO DB), the daemon must first be stopped.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:117
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
TO DB USERA/DESIGN
Reconfigured data to go to database USERA/DESIGN in current project.
TO NEW USERM/DESIGN DBNO 777
Reconfigured data to go to new database USERM/DESIGN, number 777, in
current project.
TO NEW USERM/DRAFT ACCESS UPDATE
Reconfigured data to go to new database USERM/DRAFT, N readers, 1 writer
access rights, in current project.
TO DBFILE des008
Reconfigured data to go to specified file (assumes project directory is current
directory).
TO FILES /TEMP1 /TEMP2
Only pass 1 of reconfiguration to be carried out; partially reconfigured data to be
stored in named files.
Command Syntax:
>- To -+|
||
||
||
||
‘-
DBFile filename ---------------------------------------------------.
|
DB dbname ---------------------------------------------------------|
|
FIles ----------.
|
|
|
BINaryfiles ----|
|
|
|
FORMattedfiles -+- name name --------------------------------------|
|
NEW dbname -----+- IN AREA n -.
|
|
|
|
‘-------------+- ACCess -+- UPDAte -----.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|- CONTROL ----|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘- MULTIWRITE -|
|
|
|
|
‘-------------------------+- DBNO n -|
|
|
‘----------+->
Related Commands:
FROM, RCFCOPY
7.3.94
TRANSFER (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Generate a directory containing copies of all database files at the current location, including
inter-db macro files, for transfer between the Hub and an offline Location.
Description:
This command is used at the Hub and at an offline location. All the databases at the current
location will be transferred. Before the command is given, the environment variable pointing
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:118
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
at the transfer directory must be set, and the transfer directory must exist and contain the
normal project sub-directories.
The current location must be either the Hub or an offline location. The location to which the
files are transferred must be either the Hub or an offline location.
The transfer directory is specified by the environment variable project_loc where project is
the 3-character project code and loc is the 3-character identifier of the remote location. For
example, in a Project ABC where the Hub is CAM and the offline Satellite is SYD, the
following environment variables must be set:
At CAM:
ABC_SYD
At SYD:
ABC_CAM
TRANSFER TO copies all the Project files to the transfer directory specified by the
project_loc variable. The files are then physically transferred by some means (tape, FTP
etc.), and read on to the transfer directory specified by the project_loc variable.
The System Administrator at the receiving end then uses the TRANSFER FROM command,
which updates the Location with the transferred files.
Offline Location:
Special care should be taken when using CHANGE PRIMARY for an offline location. Before
changing the primary location, it is important to ensure that the database at the new primary
location is up-to-date. This may be done by using the TRANSFER TO command at the old
primary location followed by the TRANSFER FROM command at the new primary location.
All users should have left PDMS before this transfer is made. Any subsequent work on the
database will be lost, due to the change in primary location.
Examples:
TRANSFER TO
loc
Copies all database files at the current location, together with appropriate inter db
macro files etc. to the transfer directory specified by the project_loc variable.
TRANSFER FROM loc
Updates the current location with the files transferred from Location loc. Only
databases that are allocated at the current location will be read in.
Note: There is an additional option TRANSFER - FORCEPROPG which transfers all
allocated DBs regardless of the Propagation flag. Refer to Running Global Projects
guide for a detailed explanation of this option.
Related Commands:
GENERATE LOCATION
Command Syntax:
>--- TRANSFer ---+--- TO pathname <loc> ---.
|
|
‘--- FROM pathname -------+--->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:119
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.95
TREMOVE (Project definition)
Function:
Removes users from the Set (i.e. Current) team.
Examples:
TREM SJC
Removes user SJC from the current Team.
Command Syntax:
>--- TREmove userid
.-----<------.
/
|
---*--- userid ---|
|
‘--------------+--->
Related Commands:
TADD, SET
7.3.96
TTFONT (TrueType font definition)
Function:
Reconfigures the TrueType font definition.
Description:
Used to change the attributes of the TrueType font element (TTFONT), that has previously
been created using the NEW TTFONT command.
For a description of these attributes, refer to Administrator User Guide.
Examples:
TTFONT 6 DESCRIPTION ‘My Times’
Changes the description of font no. 6, which is Times New Roman.
TTFONT 6 FACE ‘COURIER NEW’ DESCRIPTION ‘Courier’
Replace font 6 with Courier New, providing the appropriate description. Font 6 is
no longer Times New Roman.
TTFONT 6 RENUMBER 19
The font ID of font 6 is changed to 19. Font ID 6 becomes free to be re-used.
TTFONT 6 RENUMBER 19 FACE ‘Courier New’ DESCR ‘Courier’
Font no. 6 becomes free, but font no. 19 becomes ‘Courier New’ with an
appropriate description.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:120
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
.-----------<----------.
/
|
>--- TTDONT integer ---*-- DESCRiption text ----|
|
|
|-- FACE text -----------|
|
|
‘-- RENUMBER integer ----+-->
Querying:
Q FONTS
Displays information about all fonts configured in the system.
Q FONTS AVEVA
Displays information about the AVEVA fonts only.
Q FONTS TRUETYPE
Displays information about TrueType fonts only.
Related Commands:
7.3.97
UNLOCK (Project Administration)
Function:
Unlocks all locked databases.
Note: Locking and Unlocking commands are not recorded in the transaction database.
Examples:
UNLOCK
Unlocks all locked databases
In a Global Project, the System Administrator at the Hub or at a Satellite’s administering
location can unlock a Project at the Satellite:
UNLOCK AT LON
Unlocks all locked databases at Location LON.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:121
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>--- UNLOck ---+---------------.
|
|
‘--- AT <loc> --+-->
Related Commands:
LOCK
Querying a Standard (non-global) Project:
>--- Query LOCK ----->
Querying a Global Project:
>--- Query LOCK ---+--------------.
|
|
‘--- AT <loc> -+-->
7.3.98
UPDATE (Global Project Administration)
Function:
Updates the current location and an immediate neighbour.
Description:
This is a two-way process, unlike SYNCHRONISE. Databases at the current location and
databases at a neighbouring Location will be updated, according to which Location has the
most up-to-date version.
Inter-db connection macros will also be transferred, and any update script will be run.
Update scripts are linked with Update events by setting the EXECA and EXECA attributes of
the LCOMD element. See Structure of the Global Database.
Files such as Isodraft, backing-sheets files and external plot files are not propagated
automatically by the global daemon. However, there is a mechanism in the daemon to allow
such files to be transferred to and from neighbouring locations, during scheduled updates or
the UPDATE ALL command. The directory to receive transferred files is defined by the
environment variable %IMPORT%. Each location to which files are to be transferred
requires its own transfer directory - %EXP_ABC% for location ABC. Transfer of other data is
described more fully in the Global Management User Guide.
Updates of individual databases can also be made with locations which are not immediate
neighbours. In this case, the update obeys network routing. The database will be
synchronised with the database at locations on the route to the primary location; and
updated with the database on the route from the primary location to the destination.
Both Locations (and any intermediate locations) must be on-line.
Note: This command is called ‘Update Routed’ in the transaction database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:122
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples of updating constructor databases:
UPDATE ALL WITH LON
All databases at the current location and all databases at Location LON will be
compared, and updated so that all have the most recent data.
If LON is not an immediate neighbour, then updates will also be run at intermediate
locations. For example if CAM is between the current location ABC and LON, 3
updates will be run - between ABC and CAM, between CAM and LON, and finally
again between CAM and ABC.
UPDATE PIPES/PIPES WITH CAM
The PIPES/PIPES database at the current location will be compared with the
PIPES/PIPES database at Location CAM. Updates will be transferred from the
most up-to-date database to the other.
UPDATE DIRECT CTBATEST/DESI WITH CAM
The ‘Update Direct’ command is deprecated and should be used with caution. This
updates directly with the specified location ignoring the network routing. This may
cause ‘Reverse propagation’ warnings, since intermediate locations will not be
updated. This functionality is provided for upwards compatibility with older versions
of Global.
Both Locations (and any intermediate locations) must be on-line.
•
Scheduled updates run updates concurrently for several databases. The update
is scheduled as follows:
•
First the Global database will be updated;
•
Then 5concurrent DBLIST updates will be scheduled. The databases are
distributed across these 5 update commands.
•
Where possible, extracts will be included in the same update as their parent
database;
•
The system databases are updated in a separate DBLIST update.
•
Scheduled updates will not start if the previous update for the same Update
event (LCOMD) is still running. If duplicate scheduled updates are required, then
additional Update events are required. However since the standard update runs
5 updates concurrently, this should not be necessary. The results of Inter-db
macro transfer and failures from Other-data transfer are recorded in the
Transaction database.
UPDATE DBLIST <update-list> <update-options>
Where <update-list> may contain one or more of the following –
•
DB <dbnam>
•
GLOBAL/DB
•
SYSTEM/DB FOR <locnam>
•
<element-id>
•
Valid elements include MDB, DBSET, DB or LOC elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:123
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples of updating system databases:
UPDATE SYSTEM WITH CAM
The System database for the current location, at the current location, will be
compared with the System database for the current Location at Location CAM.
Updates will be transferred from the most up-to-date database to the other.
UPDATE SYSTEM FOR OXF WITH CAM
The System database for location OXF at the current Location will be compared
with the System database for location OXF at Location CAM. Updates will be
transferred from the most up-to-date database to the other.
Examples of updating the global database:
UPDATE GLOBAL WITH CAM
The Global database at the current location will be compared with the Global
database at Location CAM. Updates will be transferred from the most up-to-date
database to the other.
Command Syntax:
>- UPDATE ------+- DIRECT --------------------.
|-----------------------------|
|-- dbname -------------------|
|
|
|
.------<------. |
|
/
| |
|-- DBLIST --<update-list>-+--|
|
|
|-- SYSTEM -+- FOR ----<loc>- |
|
|
|
|
`-----------------|
|-- GLOBAL -------------------|
|
|
`-- ALL ----------------------+- WITH <loc> ------->
The <update-list> can be as follows:<update-list>--+--GLOBALdb --------------------.
|
|
|--SYSTEM-- --|-- FOR ---<loc>--|
|
`-----------------|
|-- DB ---<dbname>--------------|
|
|
`-- <element-id>----------------+--->
The <element-id> may be an MDB, DBSET, DB or LOC.
Related Commands:
SYNCHRONISE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:124
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
7.3.99
UPGRADE (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Produces macros to upgrade a project to a new version of PDMS.
Examples:
UPGRADE /OUTMACRO /INMACRO
This will produce two macro files, OUTMACRO and INMACRO. OUTMACRO will
be used in the old PDMS version to dump the contents of all DBs in the project to
intermediate files. INMACRO will be used in the new PDMS version to load the
intermediate files and recreate the complete project.
UPGRADE /OUTMACRO /INMACRO FOREIGN db1 db2 ...
All databases, including the list of foreign databases specified by the FOREIGN
option will be upgraded.
UPGRADE /OUTMACRO /INMACRO FOREIGN ALL
All databases, including all foreign databases will upgraded.
Command Syntax:
.---<------.
/
|
>--- UPGrade macro1 macro2 ---+-- FOReign --*-- dbname --’
|
|
‘-------------+--- ALL -----.
|
|
‘-------------+--->
7.3.100 USERADD TO
Function:
Add PDMS users to the Window NT authenticated user. Also allows the specified PDMS
user to be the default PDMS username for the Windows NT authenticated user.
Examples:
USERADD TO ‘fred_bloggs1’ USERA, USERB, USERC...
Adds PDMS users A, B and C to Window NT user ‘fred_bloggs1’
USERADD TO ‘fred_bloggs1’ DEFAULT USERC
Sets user C as the default PDMS user for Windows NT authenticated user
‘fred_bloggs1’.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:125
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Command Syntax:
>- USERADD -- TO --- authuser --+-- DEFAULT --username-->
|
|
|
.------------.
|
/
|
‘- username --+-- username --.
|
‘--->
Related Commands:
LIST AUTHUSER, USERREM/OVE FROM, AUTHUSERREMOVE, CREATE AUTHUSER,
AUTHENTICATION
7.3.101 USERREM/OVE FROM
Function:
Removes the specified PDMS users from the Windows NT authenticated user.
Example:
USERREM/OVE FROM ‘fred_bloggs1’ USERA, USERB, USERC...
Removes PDMS users A, B and C from Window NT user ‘fred_bloggs1’
Command Syntax:
.------------.
/
|
>- USERREM/OVE -- FROM --- authuser --+-- username --.
|
‘--->
Related Commands:
LIST AUTHUSER, USERREM/OVE FROM, AUTHUSERREMOVE, CREATE AUTHUSER,
AUTHENTICATION
7.3.102 VB (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Gives very brief output for pass 2 reconfiguration.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:126
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
Examples:
A short example of very brief output is shown below. Compare with the brief output shown in
the BRIEF command.
*** Pass one initiated ***
*** Pass one completed ***
*** Pass two initiated ***
EC
LIBY
#92/842
=16/2404
(24,90)
Warning! library number 242 already exists in the project.
Duplicate libraries should not be used in the same MDB
EC
DEPT
#16/805 =16/2408
Phase one complete - starting phase two
*** Pass two completed ***
***Reconfiguration Completed
0 Elements were not defined in DDL
0 Elements have been lost
0 Elements are no longer named
3 Attributes were incorrectly defined
0 Elements were not inserted.
Command Syntax:
>--- VB --->
Related Commands:
BRIEF, FULL, ERRORS
7.3.103 XREF (Reconfiguration)
Function:
Generates a list of the reference numbers of all elements which need updating for each
database prior to a multi-database reconfiguration. Can be used when upgrading a project
from one version of PDMS to the next.
Note: This command is normally handled automatically by the upgrade macros supplied
with a new version of PDMS. You are advised to consult your AVEVA Solutions
Support Office before using it.
Examples:
XREF /REFFILE
Reference number list to be written to file /REFFILE.
Command Syntax:
>--- XRef filename --->
Related Commands:
RESETXREFS, DUMP, UPDATE DB
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:127
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Command Details
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:128
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Dabacon Buffer Size
8
Dabacon Buffer Size
The Dabacon buffer may be between 20 Mbytes and 1 Gbyte. The default for modules in a
new project is as follows:
8.1
20 MBytes
Monitor
200 Mbytes
Admin, Specon, Propcon, Isodraft, Lexicon, Dars, Toolbox
500 Mbytes
Design, Draft, Paragon, Spooler, HullDesign, HullDrafting, Outfitting,
OutfittingDraft, Diagrams, Schematic Modeller, Tags
Specifying the Dabacon Buffer Size
The Dabacon buffer may be set in one of two ways:
8.1.1
•
Per module per project
•
For a specific window for all users
Per Module Per Project
The 'Ed Mod' command can be used to change the Dabacon Buffer size per module per
project.
The value may be specified in Mbytes or integers. 256000 integers is the same as 1 MByte.
For example:
ED MOD DESIGN 12800000
Is the same as
ED MOD DESIGN 50 MBytes
8.1.2
Per User
The Dabacon value may be fixed for a particular user by setting the environment variable
'PDMSBUF'. The value of this is always in megabytes This environment variable should be
set before running PDMS.
This will set the buffer size for use by all PDMS modules. If a value greater than 1000 is
given then the value will be rejected.
8.2
Querying the Amount of Unused Dabacon Buffer
This may be queried using the command 'Q Dabacon avail'.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Dabacon Buffer Size
8.3
Affect of Setting the Dabacon Buffer
Increasing the Dabacon buffer size is likely to reduce the amount of network I/O. Thus in
generally a larger Dabacon buffer will increase performance. However if the Dabacon buffer
is greater than the memory, then it is likely that the machine will do more paging, thus
offsetting some of the advantages of less network traffic.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Drawing File Name and Folders
A
Drawing File Name and Folders
Certain ADMIN functions such as Copy, Reconfigure, Delete may act on the drawing files
associated with DRAFT or SCHEMATIC databases. The administrator may need to know
details of these if there is a problem.
Drawing files are stored using a strict naming convention. The elements used to build the
file are illustrated below:
Prefix
The prefix is dependant on the file type, the following options are available.
File Type
Prefix
Picture file
M
Marine Hull Drawing
D
Diagram
V
Stencil
V
Template
V
Neutral Format (SVG)
V
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
A:1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Drawing File Name and Folders
Ref No
The Ref No is dependant on the file type, the following options are available:
File type
Element Type
Database
Picture file
SHEE,OVER
PADD
Marine Hull Drawing
SHEE,OVER
PADD
Diagram (Visio)
SCDIAG
SCHE
Stencil (Visio)
SCSTEN
SCHE
Template (Visio)
SCTEMP
SCHE
Neutral Format (SVG)
SCDIAG
SCHE
Extract file
The extract file number from which the Drawing was saved.
Version
The version number when the Drawing was saved.
Page Prefix
The Page number prefix part of the file name is only used when dealing with SVG files.
Page No.
Number of pages per Schematic Diagram. Only used when dealing with Neutral format
(SVG) files. Non-Visio diagrams only have one page.
File Suffix
The file name suffix is dependant on the file type, the following options are available.
Note: Visio files may be stored in either Binary or XML format; The types and numbers of
files are defined by attributes.
File type
Suffix
Picture file
-
Marine Hull Drawing
sdb
Diagram (Visio)
Vdx or vsd
Stencil (Visio)
Vsx or vss
Template (Visio)
Vtx or vst
SVG
Svg
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
A:2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Drawing File Name and Folders
Drawing files are stored in a folder defined by an environment variable. In the case of Draft
drawing files see table below the file is stored in a numbered sub-folder is determined by the
database reference (Module 32 of the second component of the reference)..
File type
Suffix
Picture file
{project}PIC
Marine Hull Drawing
{project}DRG
Diagram
{project}DIA
Stencil
{project}STE
Template
{project}TPL
SVG
{project}DIA
The following attributes may be useful at the above elements
Q DRFTYP
List of drawing file types for elements
Q DRFILE
Default drawing file name for element (for SVG files, for
highest number file)
Q DRFILE (number)
Drawing file of specification type of element
There are also attributes specific to each element type
PICF, DOFIL
for SHEE (PICF, also applies to OVER)
VISF, NVIEWF
for SCDIAG (VISF also applies to SCSTEN, SCTEMP)
Splitting of Folders
When the number of files in a folder becomes huge, the performance of the Microsoft
Windows file system can suffer. Some folders in the AVEVA PDMS project folder structure
are especially susceptible to this negative effect:
<project>PIC
containing AVEVA PDMS Draft picture files
These folders have been split by creating 32 subfolders numbered '00', '01', …, '31', and the
files, that were previously stored in the main folder, now are spread among the subfolders
using an algorithm, that guarantees the most even distribution of files. As a result, the
number of files in a single subfolder will be significantly lower, improving the file system
performance. The formula for determining the subfolder is:
subfolder number = DBREF[2] modulo 32
where DBREF[2] is the second element of the DB reference of the picture element.
For example: A sheet in the BAS project having the DB reference =15773/4101, extract file
number (EXFI) 16, and picture version number (PVNO) 25.
The associated picture file path would be:
/%BASPIC%/05/M15773-4101-16-25
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
A:3
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Drawing File Name and Folders
where the file name itself is built from the DB reference, the EXFI and PVNO attribute
values, as in previous versions, but the subfolder number (05) has been derived by the
formula:
4101 modulo 32 = 5
Assuming, that the DB references are allocated sequentially, we can then expect an even
selection of the subfolder for the picture files. Some features of the implemented algorithm:
•
If the DB reference does not change, the subfolder number also stays the same.
•
Creation of the new version of the picture, or modification of this picture from an extract
will change the EXFI or PVNO attribute values, but the reference would stay the same,
thus preserving the selected subfolder number.
•
If the picture element is removed, and then later recreated (e.g. from a DATAL
transfer), it may get assigned a different DB reference, than originally, thus getting
possibly a different subfolder for its picture file.
All existing Admin functions, including purging picture files, copying or deleting DBs,
creating or replicating projects, etc., are aware of the new folder structure. In order to
facilitate the handling of the subfolders and the files therein, the following pseudo-attributes
have been implemented.
PICF/ilename
returns the path to the AVEVA PDMS Draft picture file for
the current picture element
As compared to the folder structure valid for previous versions, the new layout looks as
follows:
Figure A:1.
Layout of the <project>PIC Folders
Figure A:2.
Layout of the <project>DWG Folder
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
A:4
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Index
A
D
Attributes
non-reference
handling of during reconfiguration 3:1,
3:3
reference
handling of during reconfiguration 3:1,
3:3
Data Integrity Checker (DICE) . . . . . . . . 2:1
DAtaBAse CONtrol program (DABACON) 3:1
Database Description Languages (DDLs) 3:1
Database Structure
Elements and their Attributes . . . 4:1, 5:1
Global Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Transaction Database . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Destination database
for reconfigure operations . . . . . 3:1, 3:2
DICE
Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Starting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
User Message File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
DUMP command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
B
Binary-format files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
BRIEF command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Brief output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
C
Character-format files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Commands
Detailed Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Summary in Functional Groups . . . . 6:1
Syntax Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1, 7:3
Communications elements
LCOMC (Admin Daemon Config) . . . 4:3
LCOMD (Comms Link Details) . . . . . 4:4
LCOML (LCOMD Elements List) . . . 4:3
LCTIMD (Event Timings) . . . . . . . . . 4:6
LCTIML (Event Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
LEVENL (Time Interval) . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Copies of databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Copy list (for reconfiguration) . 3:2, 3:4, 3:11
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
E
Elements
DB (Database) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
DBALL (Location DB List) . . . . . . . 4:14
DBLI (Database List) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
DBLOC (DB Location) . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
GRP (Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12
GRPLI (Group List) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11
LNK (Links) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14
LNKLI (Link List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14
LOC (Location) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12
LOCLI (Location List) . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12
PEROP (Perops) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
ROLE (Role) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
TEAM (Team) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Index page 1
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
Errors
reconfiguration
controlling limit of for output . . . . 3:8
ERRORS command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
F
FROM command . . . . . . . . . . 3:3, 3:13, 3:20
FULL command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Full output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
G
Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Groups
reconfiguring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
I
INCLUDE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
Index
of reference numbers . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Intermediate files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1, 3:3
Isodraft files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5, 7:122
R
RCFCOPY command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
RCFUPDATE command . . . . . . . 3:10, 3:11
Reconfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Extracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
same references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Transaction Database . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
RECONFIGURE command . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
RECONFIGURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Reference attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9, 3:10
Reference number index . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5, 3:7
loading from file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
saving to file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
References
between databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Relevant User Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
REPLICATE command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
RESETXREFS command . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Root element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
S
SAMEREF option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Source database
for reconfigure operation . . . . . . 3:1, 3:2
L
LOAD command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11
T
M
Manual Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17
O
Offline location 4:5, 4:12, 6:3, 7:8, 7:16, 7:17,
7:28, 7:38, 7:49, 7:55, 7:56, 7:58, 7:76,
7:80, 7:110, 7:115, 7:119
Output
controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
P
PADD databases
treatment of when reconfiguring . . . 3:12
Picture files
treatment of when reconfiguring . . . 3:12
Plot files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5, 7:122
Programmable Macro Language (PML) . 1:1
Projects
transferring data between . . . . . . . . 3:13
upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
TO command . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4, 3:13, 3:20
Transaction elements
TRDAY (Command Date Day) . . . . . 5:3
TRFAIL (Transaction Failure) . . . . 5:11
TRFLST (Transaction Failure List) 5:11
TRINCO (Transaction Incoming Command)
5:3
TRLOC (Transaction Location) . . . . 5:3
TRMESS (Transaction Message) . 5:11
TRMLST (Transaction Messages List) 5:11
TRMONT (Command Date Month) . 5:3
TROPER (Transaction Operation) . . 5:9
TROUCO (Transaction Output Command)
5:6
TRSLST (Transaction Success List) 5:11
TRSUCC (Transaction Success) . . 5:11
TRUSER (Transaction User) . . . . . . 5:3
TRYEAR (Command Date Year) . . . 5:3
U
Upgrade macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15
Index page 2
12 Series
Administrator Command Reference Manual
V
VB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Very Brief output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
W
World elements
GLOCWL (Global Location) . . . . . . 4:11
GROWL (Global Role) . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
GSTAT (Global Status) . . . . . . . . . . 4:7
GSTWLD (Global Stamp) . . . . . . . . 4:14
GTMWL (Global Team) . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
LCOMW (Communications) . . . . . . . 4:3
STAT (Project Status) . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
TRMSGW (Transaction Message) . . 5:2
X
XREF command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Index page 3
12 Series